37l6997
M
B
I
Netfinity 5600
Hardware Information
IBM
Netfinity 5600
Hardware Information
Note
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information in “Product
Warranties and Notices” in the “Legal Information” section of this Server Library.
First Edition (September 1999)
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you.
This publication could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information
herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or changes in the
product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any time.
This publication was developed for products and services offered in the United States of America and the United Kingdom. It is
possible that this publication may contain reference to, or information about, IBM products (machines and programs), programming,
or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that IBM intends
to announce such IBM products, programming, or services in your country.
Requests for technical information about IBM products should be made to your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without prior permission in writing from the
International Business Machines Corporation.
 Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1999. All rights reserved.
Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is subject to
restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety information statements
Lithium battery notice . . . . .
Laser compliance statements .
About this book . . . . .
How this book is organized
Notices used in this book
Related publications . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600
Features at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What your IBM Netfinity 5600 offers . . . . . . .
Reliability, availability, and serviceability features
Controls and indicators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator information panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/output connectors and expansion slots . .
Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 2. Arranging your workspace
Comfort
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glare and lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical outlets and cable lengths
. . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
. . . . .
Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Configuration/Setup Utility program . . . . .
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
Configuring options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving configuration conflicts . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . .
Using the SCSISelect utility program
Configuring the Ethernet controller . . . . . . . .
Failover for redundant Ethernet . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4. Installing options . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . .
System reliability considerations . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working inside a Netfinity 5600 server with power on
Preparing to install options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a microprocessor kit
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing memory-module kits
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing internal drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly . . . . . . . . . .
Completing the installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting external options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vii
ix
x
xi
xi
xii
xii
1
3
4
5
7
10
11
13
15
15
16
16
16
17
18
19
20
29
29
31
34
34
39
40
41
42
42
43
43
52
61
64
66
78
80
82
84
89
iii
Chapter 5. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
Installing the rack model in a rack enclosure . . . . .
Chapter 6. Solving problems
. . .
Diagnostic tools overview . . . . . . .
Diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on self-test (POST) messages
Power-on self test (POST) beep codes
Recovering BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic error message tables . . .
Ethernet controller messages . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving configuration conflicts . . .
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Checking the system for damage
. .
Replacing the battery
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
99
107
108
110
112
122
124
125
136
143
151
151
158
159
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
163
164
170
171
173
174
175
175
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
177
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
179
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
181
Appendix A. I²O-compliant statement
Appendix B. Power cords
iv
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 7. Server records and specifications
Record the identification numbers . . . . . . . .
Installed device records . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing jumper positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
System board component locations . . . . . . .
System board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor board component locations . . . . . .
Processor board jumper and switches . . . . . .
Index
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tables
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
Serial port pin-number assignments . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel port pin-number assignments . . . . . . . . . . .
Video port pin-number assignments . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard port pin-number assignments
. . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary-device port pin-number assignments . . . . . .
68-pin SCSI port connector pin-number assignments . .
Ethernet port pin-number assignments . . . . . . . . . .
USB port pin-number assignments . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IBM Netfinity 5600 identification numbers
. . . . . . . .
Internal and external drives and devices . . . . . . . . .
Configuration/Setup Utility program defaults and changes
System memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expansion slot configuration information . . . . . . . . .
Netfinity 5600 server operating specifications . . . . . .
System board jumper (J20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor board switch block 2 (SW2) Settings . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
91
92
93
93
94
95
96
97
154
163
164
165
169
169
170
174
176
176
v
vi
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Safety information statements
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações de Segurança.
Před instalací tohoto produktu si přečtěte příručku bezpečnostních instrukcí.
Læs sikkerhedsforskrifterne, før du installerer dette produkt.
Ennen kuin asennat tämän tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.
Avant d'installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de sécurité.
Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.
Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza
Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.
Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) før du installerer dette produktet.
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informações sobre Segurança.
Pred inštaláciou tohto zariadenia si pečítaje Bezpečnostné predpisy.
Antes de instalar este producto lea la información de seguridad.
Läs säkerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den här produkten.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
vii
1
DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication
cables is hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
– Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform
installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product
during an electrical storm.
– Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded
electrical outlet.
– Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be
attached to this product.
– When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect
signal cables.
– Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire,
water, or structural damage.
– Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications
systems, networks, and modems before you open the
device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation
and configuration procedures.
– Connect and disconnect cables as described in the
following table when installing, moving, or opening covers
on this product or attached devices.
To Connect:
1. Turn everything OFF.
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to devices.
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet.
4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.
viii
To Disconnect:
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Lithium battery notice
2
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354
or an equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If
your system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only
with the same module type made by the same manufacturer. The
battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled,
or disposed of.
Do not:
– Throw or immerse into water
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
– Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
Safety information statements
ix
Laser compliance statements
Some IBM PC Server and Netfinity models are equipped from the factory with a
CD-ROM drive. CD-ROM drives are also sold separately as options. The
CD-ROM drive is a laser product. The CD-ROM drive is certified in the U.S. to
conform to the requirements of the Department of Health and Human Services 21
Code of Federal Regulations (DHHS 21 CFR) Subchapter J for Class 1 laser
products. Elsewhere, the drive is certified to conform to the requirements of the
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 825 and CENELEC EN 60 825 for
Class 1 laser products.
3
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic
devices, or transmitters) are installed, note the following:
– Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser
product could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation.
There are no serviceable parts inside the device.
– Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class
3B laser diode. Note the following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not
view directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct
exposure to the beam.
x
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
How this book is organized
About this book
This book provides instructions for installing and removing server options and
configuring and troubleshooting your server. It also provides information to help
you solve problems if they occur.
How this book is organized
Chapter 1, “Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600,” describes the Netfinity 5600 server
and provides an overview of the server's features.
Chapter 2, “Arranging your workspace,” provides information on arranging your
equipment and workspace.
Chapter 3, “Configuring your server,” describes how to use the Configuration/Setup
Utility program to configure your server. This chapter also provides instructions for
using various utility programs.
Chapter 4, “Installing options,” contains instructions for installing and removing
options, such as memory, adapters, and internal drives. Instructions for connecting
external options are also included in this chapter.
Chapter 5, “Installing a server in a rack enclosure,” contains information about
installing your server in a rack.
Chapter 6, “Solving problems,” includes an overview of the diagnostic tools,
instructions for testing the server, lists of error messages, and troubleshooting
charts. This chapter also contains information about checking the server for
damage, and resolving configuration conflicts.
Chapter 7, “Server records and specifications,” provides a section to record and
update important information about your server, including serial numbers, key
number, and device records. Whenever you add options to your server, be sure to
update the information in these records. In addition to server records, this chapter
contains specifications. These specifications include product dimensions,
environmental operating requirements, system and processor board layouts, and
jumper settings. This chapter also describes jumper locations and contains
instructions for changing jumpers.
Appendix A, “I²O-compliant statement,” contains the I2O-compliant statement.
Appendix B, “Power cords,” contains information about power cords for use in other
countries.
An index follows the appendices.
To find the meanings of various computer-related terms, you can access the IBM
Dictionary of Computing at the following World Wide Web address:
http://www.networking.ibm.com/nsg/nsgmain.htm
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
xi
Related publications
Notices used in this book
This book contains information notices that relate to a specific topic. The Caution
and Danger notices also appear in a multilingual safety booklet. Each notice is
numbered for easy reference to the corresponding notices in the safety booklet.
The notice definitions are as follows:
Ÿ Notes
These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
Ÿ Attention
These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or data. An
attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage could occur.
Ÿ Caution
These notices indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous to you. A
caution notice is placed just before descriptions of potentially hazardous
procedure steps or situations.
Ÿ Danger
These notices indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or extremely
hazardous to you. A danger notice is placed just before descriptions of
potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure steps or situations.
Related publications
The IBM Hardware Maintenance Manual is available for purchase. It contains a
parts catalog, error codes, and advanced diagnostic procedures. This manual is
intended for trained service technicians. (Diagnostic programs are not included.)
The following publications pertain to the server's Ethernet controller. They are
available for purchase from IBM.
Ÿ IBM LAN Technical Reference IEEE 802.2 and NETBIOS API, SC30-3587
Ÿ IBM LAN Server Command and Utilities, S10H-9686
Ÿ Guide to LAN Server Books, S10H-9688
Additional publications are available for purchase from IBM. For a list of
publications available in your country:
Ÿ In the U.S., Canada, and Puerto Rico, call 1-800-879-2755.
Ÿ In all other countries, contact the IBM support organization that services your
area, your IBM marketing representative, or your IBM reseller.
xii
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600
Your IBM Netfinity 5600 server is a high-performance, symmetric
multiprocessing (SMP) server. It is ideally suited for networking environments that
require superior microprocessor performance, efficient memory management,
flexibility, and large amounts of reliable data storage.
Performance, ease of use, reliability, and expansion capabilities were key
considerations during the design of your server. These design features make it
possible for you to customize the system hardware to meet your needs today, while
providing flexible expansion capabilities for the future.
Your IBM Netfinity 5600 server comes with a three-year limited warranty and IBM
Netfinity/PC Server 90-Day Start Up Support. If you have access to the World
Wide Web, you can obtain up-to-date information about your Netfinity 5600 model
and other IBM server products at the following World Wide Web address:
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/netfinity/
Your server serial number and model number are located on labels on the rear of
the server and on the front under the trim bezel. Write these numbers in the
spaces provided in “Record the identification numbers” on page 163. You will need
these numbers when you register your server with IBM. After you register your
server, you can receive information about updates, performance tips, and
compatibility. To register your server, go to the following World Wide Web address:
http://www.ibm.com/pc/register
For service, assistance, or additional information on IBM Netfinity/PC Server
90-Day Start Up Support and the World Wide Web, see the “Getting Help, Service,
and Information” section of this Server Library.
If you have not yet set up your server, see the “Start Here” section of this Server
Library for detailed information about attaching cables and installing an operating
system. Before you set up your server, be sure to read the information on IBM
ServerGuide in the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information” section of
this Server Library.
To find the meanings of various computer-related terms, you can access the IBM
Dictionary of Computing at the following World Wide Web address:
http://www.networking.ibm.com/nsg/nsgmain.htm
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
1
4
k18 kg (37 lbs)
k32 kg (70.5 lbs)
CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.
2
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
k55 kg (121.2 lbs)
Features at a glance
This chapter contains:
Features at a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What your IBM Netfinity 5600 offers . . . . . . .
Reliability, availability, and serviceability features
Controls and indicators
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator information panel . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/output connectors and expansion slots . .
Power supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
4
5
7
10
11
13
Features at a glance
The following table summarizes the features of the Netfinity 5600 server.
Microprocessor
Ÿ Intel Pentium III microprocessor
with MMX technology and SIMD
extensions
Ÿ 32 KB of level-1 cache
Ÿ 256 KB of level-2 cache (min.)
Ÿ Expandable to two microprocessors
Memory
Ÿ Standard: 128 MB, expandable to 4
GB
Ÿ 133 MHz, registered, error correcting
code (ECC), synchronous dynamic
random access memory (SDRAM)
complying with PC 133 SDRAM
Registered DIMM Specification,
Revision 1.0 or later). (When
installed in systems using 100 MHz
front-side bus microprocessors, the
memory operates at 100 MHz.
Ÿ Four dual inline memory-module
(DIMM) sockets
Diskette Drive
Ÿ Standard: One 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB
Hard Disk Drives
Ÿ Up to six hot-swappable hard disk
drives supported
CD-ROM Drive
Ÿ Standard: 40X IDE
Keyboard and Auxiliary Device
(standard only on tower models)
Ÿ Keyboard
Ÿ Mouse
Expansion Bays
Ÿ Six slim (1-inch) or three half-high
(1.6-inch) hot-swap drive bays
Ÿ Three 5.25-inch non-hot-swap bays
(one used by CD-ROM drive)
Expansion Slots
Integrated Functions
Up to five adapters can be installed.
Ÿ Three 64-bit hot-plug PCI slots
Ÿ Two standard (non-hot-plug) 32-bit
PCI slot
Upgradable Microcode
Ÿ BIOS, diagnostics, and Netfinity
Advanced System Management
Processor upgrades (when
available) can update EEPROMs
on the system board
Security Features
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ Door and side cover lock (tower
model only)
Ÿ Power-on and administrator
passwords
Ÿ Selectable drive-startup
Ÿ Keyboard password
Ÿ Systems management security
– User log-in password
– Read-only or read/write access
– Dial back
Predictive Failure Analysis (PFA)
Alerts
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Power supplies
Fans
Memory
Hard disk drives
Microprocessors
Voltage regulator modules (VRMs)
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Two serial ports
Two universal serial bus (USB) ports
One parallel port
Mouse port
Keyboard port
Video port
Advanced System Management
Interconnect port
Two SCSI ports (one internal, one
external)
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX Ethernet port
(controller on system board)
Redundant Ethernet capability,
through the use of an optional
network interface card (NIC)
Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor on system
board
Dedicated Advanced System
Management I/O port
Video controller (with 4 MB video
memory) compatible with:
– Super video graphics array
(SVGA)
– Video graphics adapter (VGA)
Power Supply
Ÿ Two 250 W (115–230 V ac)
– Standard - 500 W non-redundant,
250 W redundant
– Optional - Additional 250 W
power supply is available for
500 W redundancy
Ÿ Automatic voltage range selection
Ÿ Built-in overload and surge protection
Ÿ Automatic restart after a loss of
power
Redundant Cooling
Ÿ Three hot-swap fans
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600
3
What your IBM Netfinity 5600 offers
What your IBM Netfinity 5600 offers
The unique design of your server takes advantage of advancements in symmetric
multiprocessing (SMP), data storage, and memory management. Your server
combines:
Ÿ Impressive performance using an innovative approach to SMP
Your server supports up to two Pentium III microprocessors. Your server
comes with one microprocessor installed; you can install an additional
microprocessor to enhance performance and provide SMP capability.
Ÿ Large data-storage and hot-swap capabilities
All models of the server support up to six hot-swap hard disk drives. This
hot-swap feature enables you to remove and replace hard disk drives without
turning off the server.
Ÿ Hot-plug PCI adapter capabilities
Your server has three hot-plug slots for PCI adapters. With operating system
support, you can replace failing hot-plug PCI adapters without turning off the
server. If the hot-add feature is supported by your operating system and the
PCI adapter, you can also add PCI adapters in these slots without turning off
the server.
Ÿ Redundant cooling and power capabilities
The redundant cooling and hot-swap capabilities of the fans in your server
allow continued operation if one of the fans fails. You can also replace a failing
fan without turning off the server.
The two 250-watt power supplies in your server provide redundant power for
many configurations of your server. If the average load on your server is less
than 250 watts and a problem occurs with one of the power supplies, the other
power supply can handle the load. For power loads above 250 watts, you can
install a third, optional power supply to provide a full 500 watts of power. The
NON REDUNDANT light emitting diode (LED) on the diagnostic LED panel is lit
when the power load is 250 watts or greater with two power supplies installed.
Ÿ Large system memory
The memory bus in your server supports up to 4 GB of system memory. The
memory controller provides error correcting code (ECC) support for up to four
industry standard PC133, 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, registered,
synchronous-dynamic-random access memory (SDRAM) DIMMs (Intel
PC-Registered SDIMM Specifications, Revision 1.0 or later), synchronous, dual
inline memory modules.
Ÿ System-management capabilities
Your server comes with a Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
on the system board. This processor, in conjunction with the Netfinity
Manager provided on your ServerGuide CDs, allows you to manage the
functions of the server locally and remotely. The Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor also provides system monitoring, event recording, and
dial-out alert capability.
Note: The Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor is sometimes
referred to as the service processor.
4
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
RAS features
Refer to the “Advanced System Management Information” section of this Server
Library for more information.
Ÿ Integrated network environment support
Your server comes with an Ethernet controller on the system board. This
Ethernet controller has an interface for connecting to 10-Mbps or 100-Mbps
networks. The server automatically selects between 10BASE-T and
100BASE-TX. The controller provides full-duplex (FDX) capability, which allows
simultaneous transmission and reception of data on the Ethernet local area
network (LAN).
Ÿ Redundant network-interface card
The addition of an optional, redundant network interface card (NIC) provides a
failover capability to a redundant Ethernet connection. If a problem occurs with
the primary Ethernet connection, all Ethernet traffic associated with this primary
connection is automatically switched to the redundant NIC. This switching
occurs without data loss and without user intervention.
Ÿ IBM ServerGuide CDs
The ServerGuide CDs included with IBM Netfinity servers provide programs to
help you set up your server and install the network operating system (NOS).
The ServerGuide program detects the hardware options installed, and provides
the correct configuration program and device drivers. In addition, the
ServerGuide CDs include a variety of application programs such as IBM Update
Connector to help keep your server BIOS and microcode updated, and IBM
Netfinity Manager for systems management.
For more information about the ServerGuide CDs, see the “ServerGuide and
Netfinity Manager Information” section of this Server Library.
Your server is designed to be cost-effective, powerful, and flexible. It uses
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) bus architecture to provide compatibility
with a wide range of existing hardware devices and software applications.
As always, your IBM server meets stringent worldwide certifications for power,
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), and safety. Refer to the “Legal Information”
section of this Server Library for additional information.
Reliability, availability, and serviceability features
Three of the most important features in server design are reliability, availability, and
serviceability (RAS). These factors help to ensure the integrity of the data stored
on your server; that your server is available when you want to use it; and that
should a failure occur, you can easily diagnose and repair the failure with minimal
inconvenience.
The following is an abbreviated list of the RAS features that your server supports.
Many of these features are explained in later chapters or sections of this Server
Library.
Ÿ Menu-driven setup, system configuration, RAID configuration, and diagnostic
programs
Ÿ Power-on self-test (POST)
Ÿ Integrated Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
Ÿ Predictive failure alerts
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600
5
RAS features
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
1
6
System auto-configuring from configuration menu
Remote system problem-determination support
Power and temperature monitoring
Fault-resilient startup
Hot-swap drive bays
Support for hot-plug PCI adapters
Error codes and messages
System error logging
Upgradable BIOS, diagnostics, and Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor code
Automatic restart after a power failure
Parity checking on the SCSI and PCI buses
Error checking and correcting (ECC) memory
Redundant hot-swap power supply option
Redundant hot-swap cooling
Redundant Ethernet capabilities (with optional adapter)
Vital Product Data (VPD) on processor complex, system board, power
backplane, SCSI backplane, and each power supply.
Operator information and diagnostic LED panels
Customer support center 24 hours per day 7 days a week1
Update Connector
Remote Connect
Service availability will vary by country. Response time will vary depending on the number and nature of incoming calls.
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Controls and indicators
Controls and indicators
The most commonly used controls and indicators on the front of the server appear
in the following illustrations.
Tower model
Rack model
.1/ Operator Information Panel: The lights on this panel give status information
for your server. See “Operator information panel” for more information.
.2/ Diskette-Eject Button: Press this button to eject a diskette from the drive.
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600
7
Controls and indicators
.3/ Diskette Drive In-Use Light: When this light is on, the diskette drive is being
accessed.
.4/ CD-ROM Eject/Load Button: Press this button to eject or retract the
CD-ROM tray so that you can insert or remove a CD.
.5/ Hard Disk Status Light: Each of the hot-swap drive bays has a Hard Disk
Status light. When this amber light is on continuously, the drive has failed.
When the light flashes slowly (one flash per second), the drive is being rebuilt.
When the light flashes rapidly (three flashes per second), the controller is
identifying the drive.
.6/ Hard Disk Activity Light: Each of the hot-swap drive bays has a Hard Disk
Activity light. When this green light is flashing, the drive is being accessed.
.7/ Cover Release Lever: Use this lever to release the left-side cover on the
tower model or the top cover on the rack model.
.8/ Reset Button: Press this button to reset the server and run the power-on
self-test (POST).
.9/ Power Control Button: Press this button to manually turn the server on or
off.
5
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on
the power supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to
the device. The device also might have more than one power
cord. To remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that
all power cords are disconnected from the power source.
2
1
The server can be activated in several ways:
Ÿ You can turn on the server by pressing the Power Control button on the
front of the server.
Note: If you have just plugged the power cord of your server into an
electrical outlet, you will have to wait approximately 20 seconds
before pressing the Power Control button.
Ÿ If the server is activated and a power failure occurs, the server will start
automatically when power is restored.
Ÿ The server can also be powered on by the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor.
8
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Controls and indicators
The server can be deactivated as follows:
Ÿ You can turn off the server by pressing the Power Control button on the
front of the server. Pressing the Power Control button starts an orderly
shutdown of the operating system, if this feature is supported by your
operating system, and places the server in standby mode.
Note: After turning off the server, wait at least 5 seconds before pressing
the Power Control button to power the server on again.
Ÿ You can press and hold the Power Control button for more than 4
seconds to cause an immediate shutdown of the server and place the
server in standby mode. This feature can be used if the operating system
hangs.
Ÿ You can disconnect the server power cords from the electrical outlets to
shut off all power to the server.
Note: Wait about 15 seconds after disconnecting the power cords for
your system to stop running. Watch for the System Power light on
the operator information panel to stop blinking.
.1ð/ CD-ROM Drive In-Use Light: When this light is on, the CD-ROM drive is
being accessed.
.11/ CD-ROM Manual Tray-Release Opening: Insert a straightened paper clip in
the opening to release the CD-ROM tray when using the CD-ROM eject
button is not successful.
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600
9
Operator information panel
Operator information panel
The operator information panel on the front of the server contains status lights.
OK
1
2
100 LINK TX
MB OK
RX
.1/ System Power Light: When this green light is on, system power is present
in the server. When this light flashes, the server is in standby mode (the
system power supply is turned off and AC current is present). When this light
is off, either a power supply, AC power, or a light has failed.
Attention: If this light is off, it does not mean there is no electrical current
present in the server. The light might be burned out. To remove all electrical
current from the server, you must unplug the server power cords from the
electrical outlets.
.2/ System POST Complete Light: This green light is on when the power-on
self-test (POST) completes without any errors.
.3/ SCSI Hard Disk Drive Activity Light: This green light is on when there is
activity on a hard disk drive.
.4/ Processor 1 Activity Light: This green light is on when there is
microprocessor 1 activity.
.5/ Processor 2 Activity Light: This green light is on when there is
microprocessor 2 activity.
.6/ Information Light: This amber light is on when the information log contains
information about certain conditions in your server that might affect
performance. For example, the light will be on if your server does not have
redundant power. A light on the diagnostic LED panel will also be on. (For
more information, see “Identifying problems using status LEDs” on page 151.)
.7/ System Error Light: This amber light is on when a system error occurs. A
light on the diagnostic LED panel will also be on to further isolate the error.
(For more information, see “Identifying problems using status LEDs” on
page 151.)
.8/ Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity Light: When this green light is on,
there is transmit or receive activity to or from the server.
.9/ Ethernet Link Status Light: When this green light is on, there is an active
connection on the Ethernet port.
.1ð/ Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps: When this green light is on, the Ethernet speed
is 100 Mbps. When the light is off, the Ethernet speed is 10 Mbps.
10
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Input/output connectors and expansion slots
Input/output connectors and expansion slots
The following illustrations show the expansion slots and the input/output connectors
(ports) on the rear of the server.
Tower model
DC
DC
AC
AC
Rack model
DC
AC
DC
AC
.1/ Advanced System Management Interconnect Knockout: Your server has
an external connector knockout for the Advanced System Management
Interconnect option. This option allows you to connect rack or multirack
systems through a daisy-chain cable in half-duplex mode.
.2/ External Connector Knockout: Your server has an external connector
knockout that can be used when you install options.
.3/ PCI Expansion Slots: Your server has five available peripheral component
interconnect (PCI) expansion slots. Three of the PCI slots support hot-plug
PCI adapters.
Many adapters provide bus-master capabilities, which enable the adapters to
perform operations without interrupting the system microprocessors.
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600
11
Input/output connectors and expansion slots
.4/ Serial A Connector: A serial signal cable for a modem or other serial device
connects to this 9-pin serial connector. Serial port A can be shared by the
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor and the operating system.
See “Devices and I/O Ports” on page 21 for port assignment information. If
you are using a 25-pin signal cable, you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin adapter cable.
.5/ Serial B Connector: A serial signal cable for a modem or other serial device
connects to this 9-pin serial connector. Serial port B is used by the operating
system and cannot be shared by the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. See “Devices and I/O Ports” on page 21 for port assignment
information. If you are using a 25-pin signal cable, you need a 9-pin-to-25-pin
adapter cable.
.6/ Hot-Plug PCI Expansion Slots: Your server has three hot-plug PCI
expansion slots.
.7/ Attention Lights for Hot-Plug PCI Slots: Each hot-plug PCI slot has an
Attention light that is visible from the rear of the server. An Attention light
flashes approximately once per second when it is on. The meaning of the
Attention lights is defined by your operating system. Refer to your operating
system documentation to determine if it supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if
so, what the Attention lights indicate.
.8/ Non-Hot-Plug PCI Expansion Slots: Your server has two non-hot-plug PCI
expansion slots.
.9/ Parallel Connector: A signal cable for a parallel device, such as a printer,
connects here.
.1ð/ SCSI Connector: External SCSI devices attach here. For more information,
see “Connecting external options” on page 89.
.11/ Management Port C Connector: This connector is used to attach a modem
that is dedicated to communication with the Netfinity Advanced System
Management Processor.
.12/ Video Connector: The monitor signal cable connects here.
.13/ Universal Serial Bus 1 and 2 Connectors: You can attach an I/O device to
either of these universal serial bus (USB) connectors. USB 2 is the connector
nearest to the edge of the server. You need a 4-pin cable to connect a
device to USB 1 or 2.
Note: If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached to the keyboard port, the
USB ports are disabled while the power-on self-test (POST) is running
and no USB devices will work during POST.
.14/ Ethernet Connector: Your server has one RJ-45 Ethernet connector. This
connector is for attaching the network cable to the integrated 10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX, twisted-pair transceiver.
.15/ Mouse Connector: The mouse cable connects here. This port sometimes is
called an auxiliary-device or pointing-device port.
.16/ Keyboard Connector: The keyboard cable connects here.
.17/ Power Connectors: The power cords for the power supplies connect here.
Note: For pin assignments and other details about these connectors, see
“Connecting external options” on page 89.
12
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Power supplies
Power supplies
The following illustrations show the power supplies and power lights on your server.
Your server comes with two hot-swap power supplies installed. You can install a
third power supply. See “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page 78 for
instructions about installing an additional power supply and information about power
redundancy.)
Note: See Appendix B, “Power cords” on page 179 for information about power
cords for use with your server in your country or region.
Tower model
Rack model
.1/ Power Supply 1: Your server comes with two hot-swap power supplies
installed. (See “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page 78 for
instructions about installing an additional power supply and information about
power redundancy.)
.2/ Power Supply 2: Your server comes with two hot-swap power supplies
installed.
Chapter 1. Introducing the IBM Netfinity 5600
13
Power supplies
.3/ Filler Panel: You can remove this filler panel and install a third hot-swap
power supply on power supply bay 3.
.4/ Power Supply 2 Power Connector: The power cord for power supply 2
connects here.
.5/ Power Supply 1 Power Connector: The power cord for power supply 1
connects here.
.6/ DC Power Light: This light provides status information about the power
supply. During normal operation, both the AC and DC Power lights are on.
For any other combination of lights, see “Power supply LEDs” on page 152
for more information.
.7/ AC Power Light: This light provides status information about the power
supply. During normal operation, both the AC and DC Power lights are on.
For any other combination of lights, see “Power supply LEDs” on page 152
for more information.
14
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Arranging your workspace
Chapter 2. Arranging your workspace
To get the most from your server, arrange both the equipment you use and your
work area to suit your needs and the kind of work you do. Your comfort is of
foremost importance, but light sources, air circulation, and the location of electrical
outlets also can affect the way you arrange your workspace.
You can also refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section of this
Server Library for information about obtaining ergonomic and environmental
information from the World Wide Web.
This chapter contains:
Comfort
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glare and lighting . . . . . . . . . .
Air circulation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical outlets and cable lengths
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
16
16
16
Comfort
Although no single working position is ideal for everyone, here are a few guidelines
to help you find a position that suits you best.
Sitting in the same position for a long time can cause fatigue. A good chair can
make a big difference. The backrest and seat should adjust independently and
provide good support. The seat should have a curved front to relieve pressure on
the thighs. Adjust the seat so that your thighs are parallel to the floor and your feet
are either flat on the floor or on a footrest.
When using the keyboard, keep your forearms parallel to the floor and your wrists
in a neutral, comfortable position. Try to keep a light touch on the keyboard and
your hands and fingers relaxed. You can change the angle of the keyboard for
maximum comfort by adjusting the position of the keyboard feet.
Viewing Distance
Lower
Back
Support
Seat
Height
Adjust the monitor so the top of the screen is at, or slightly below, eye level. Place
the monitor at a comfortable viewing distance, usually 51 to 61 cm (20 to 24 in.),
and position it so you can view it without having to twist your body. Also position
other equipment you use regularly, such as the telephone or a mouse, within easy
reach.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
15
Arranging your workspace
Glare and lighting
Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections from overhead lights,
windows, and other light sources. Even reflected light from shiny surfaces can
cause annoying reflections on your monitor screen. Place the monitor at right
angles to windows and other light sources, when possible. Reduce overhead
lighting, if necessary, by turning off lights or using lower wattage bulbs. If you
install the monitor near a window, use curtains or blinds to block the sunlight. You
might have to adjust the Brightness and Contrast controls on the monitor as the
room lighting changes throughout the day.
Where it is impossible to avoid reflections or to adjust the lighting, an antiglare filter
placed over the screen might be helpful. However, these filters might affect the
clarity of the image on the screen; try them only after you have exhausted other
methods of reducing glare.
Dust buildup compounds problems associated with glare. Remember to clean your
monitor screen periodically using a soft cloth moistened with a nonabrasive liquid
glass cleaner.
Air circulation
Your server and monitor produce heat. Your server has one or more fans that pull
in fresh air and force out hot air. The monitor lets hot air escape through vents.
Blocking the air vents can cause overheating, which might result in a malfunction or
damage. Place the server and monitor so that nothing blocks the air vents; usually,
15 cm (6 inches) of air space is sufficient. Also, make sure the vented air is not
blowing on someone else.
Electrical outlets and cable lengths
The location of electrical outlets and the length of power cords and cables that
connect to the monitor, printer, and other devices might determine the final
placement of your server.
When arranging your workspace:
Ÿ Avoid the use of extension cords. When possible, plug the server power cords
directly into electrical outlets.
Ÿ Keep power cords and cables neatly routed away from walkways and other
areas where they might get kicked accidentally.
For more information about power cords, refer to the “Legal Information” section of
this Server Library.
16
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
This chapter provides information about the Configuration/Setup Utility program that
comes with your server.
The Configuration/Setup Utility program is part of the basic input/output system
(BIOS) that comes with your server. Using these programs, you can set the
system date and time, define input and output device parameters, and define
system security.
The ROM-based diagnostic program that comes with the server provides diagnostic
support for the system memory, disk drives, and other system components.
This chapter contains:
Configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Configuration/Setup Utility program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Devices and I/O Ports
Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event/Error Logs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restore Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exit Setup
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving configuration conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving hardware configuration conflicts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving software configuration conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the SCSISelect utility program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the SCSISelect Utility program
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSISelect Utility program choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring the Ethernet controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Failover for redundant Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special considerations when combining failover and hot-plug functions
Configuring for failover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . . .
. . .
. . . .
18
19
20
21
21
21
22
22
26
26
28
28
28
28
29
29
29
30
30
31
31
31
34
34
35
35
17
Configuration overview
Configuration overview
You play a key role in how your server allocates resources to organize and
interconnect hardware devices and software programs. This allocation process is
referred to as configuration. The steps required to configure your server depend on
the number and types of devices and programs that you install.
Your server supports PCI adapters and SCSI devices. Because of this flexibility,
you can choose from among many adapters and devices.
In general, the greater the number and variety of hardware devices and software
programs that you install in your server, the more you will have to interact with your
server and your devices to correctly configure your system.
Your server comes with the following hardware configuration programs:
Ÿ Configuration/Setup Utility program
With the built-in Configuration/Setup Utility program, you can configure I/O
functions, such as serial and parallel port assignments; change interrupt
request (IRQ) settings; and change the startup sequence for drives that you
install. You also can use this program to set passwords for starting up the
server and accessing the Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Ÿ SCSISelect Utility program
With the built-in SCSISelect Utility program, you can configure the SCSI
devices that you attach to the SCSI controller. You can use SCSISelect to
change default values, resolve configuration conflicts, and perform a low-level
format on a SCSI hard disk drive.
Before installing a new device or program, read the documentation that comes with
it. Reading the instructions helps you to determine the steps required for
installation and configuration. The following actions are typically, but not always,
required to configure your server.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and record the current
configuration settings.
2. Set jumpers or switches on server components.
See “Changing jumper positions” on page 171.
3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the device installation instructions.
4. Install the device in the server.
See Chapter 4, “Installing options” on page 39.
5. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions that come with the software.
6. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Resolving configuration conflicts” on page 29.
18
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
The Configuration/Setup Utility program
The Configuration/Setup Utility program
For most configurations, the server will operate using the default system settings.
You need to change the settings only to resolve configuration conflicts or to enable
or change device functions (for example, defining diskette types, and so on).
When you want or need to change the default settings, the Configuration/Setup
Utility program provides a convenient way to display and change the settings.
After you run and exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility program, configuration
information is stored in electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
(EEPROM). While the server is off, the configuration information remains available
for the next system startup.
Always run the Configuration/Setup Utility program if you add, remove, or relocate
any hardware option, or if you receive an error message instructing you to do so.
Review this chapter and the information that comes with the option before making
changes. Also, record the current settings (see Chapter 7, “Server records and
specifications”) before making any changes.
To start the Configuration/Setup Utility program:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
2. When the message Press F1 for Configuration/Setup appears, press F1.
Note: If you enter the power-on password and an administrator
(supervisor-level) password is also set, a limited version of the menu
appears. To see the full menu, you must restart the server and enter
the administrator password when you are prompted to enter a
password. See “System Security” on page 22 for additional
information.
The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu appears. For information about the
menu, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
Notes:
a. When the message Press F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2 to run
the diagnostics programs. For information about running the diagnostics
programs, see “Diagnostic programs” on page 110.
b. When the message Press Alt-F1 for System Partition Boot appears,
press Alt-F1 to start the system from the system partition. See the
“ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information” section of this Server
Library for information about using ServerGuide to create a system
partition.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
19
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
From the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, you can select settings that you
want to change. The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu is similar to the
following screen.
IBM Netfinity Setup - © Copyright IBM Corporation
Configuration/Setup Utility
• System Summary
• System Information
• Devices and I/O Ports
• Date and Time
• System Security
• Start Options
• Advanced Setup
• Event/Error Logs
Save Settings
Restore Settings
Load Default Settings
Exit Setup
<F1> Help
<Esc> Exit
< ↑ > < ↓ > Move
<Enter> Select
Pressing F1 displays Help information for a selected menu item.
Note: The choices on some menus might differ slightly, depending on the BIOS
version that comes with your server.
To change configuration settings:
1. Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to highlight the menu item for the
configuration setting that you want to change; then, press Enter.
2. Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to choose the appropriate
setting for the selected menu item; then, press Enter.
3. Repeat step 1 through step 2 for each setting that you want to change. Press
Esc to return to the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
4. After making changes, you can select:
Ÿ Save Settings to save the selected changes.
Ÿ Restore Settings to delete the changes and restore the previous settings.
Ÿ Load Default Settings to cancel the changes and restore the factory
settings.
Note: The Configuration/Setup Utility main menu selections do not save
settings, restore settings, or load default settings for the PCI Slot/Device
Information choice. To save settings, or restore settings for the PCI
Slot/Device Information choice, you must use the menu selections
available from the PCI Slot/Device Information choice.
5. To exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu, select Exit Setup. If
you made any changes and did not save them with the Save Settings choice,
the system prompts you to save or discard the changes when you attempt to
exit from the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
20
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
System Summary
Select this choice to display configuration information, including the type and speed
of the microprocessors and amount of memory.
Changes that you make to configuration settings appear on this summary screen.
You cannot edit the fields.
The System Summary choice appears on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu and on the limited Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
System Information
Select this choice to display information about your server. Changes that you make
on other menus might appear on this summary screen. You cannot edit any fields.
The System Information choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
Product Data
Select this choice to view system information, such as the machine type and model,
the system serial number, and the revision level or issue date of the BIOS stored
on the flash electronically erasable programmable ROM (EEPROM).
System Card Data
Select this choice to view vital product data (VPD) for some server components.
Devices and I/O Ports
Software recognizes ports through their port assignments. Each port must have a
unique port assignment. The Configuration/Setup Utility program normally handles
this, but you might have special hardware or software that requires you to change
these assignments.
Select the Devices and I/O Ports choice to view or change the assignments for
devices and input/output ports.
You can add serial ports by installing a serial adapter in an expansion slot. See
the documentation that comes with the serial adapter for information about port
assignments.
You can configure the parallel port as bidirectional; that is, so that data can be both
read from and written to a device. In bidirectional mode, the server supports
Extended Capabilities Port (ECP) and Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP).
To display or change the assignments for devices, the serial ports, or parallel
port:
1. Select Devices and I/O Ports.
2. Select a device or port; use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
advance through the settings.
The Devices and I/O Ports choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup
Utility main menu.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
21
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
Notes:
1. When you configure the parallel port as bidirectional, use an IEEE
1284-compliant cable. The maximum length of the cable must not exceed 3
meters (9.8 feet).
2. The universal serial bus (USB) is configured automatically.
3. If you install a USB keyboard that has a mouse port, the USB keyboard
emulates a mouse and you will not be able to disable the mouse settings in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Date and Time
Select this choice to set the system date and time and to change the system time
sent to the Advanced System Management Processor (service processor) when the
server is started.
The system time is in a 24-hour format: hour:minute:second.
The system date is in standard format for your country. For example, in the United
States, the format is MM/DD/YYYY (Month/Day/Year).
Select Date and Time; then, use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
advance through each data field. Type the new information; the system saves the
information as you type it.
You can set a time delta to be added or subtracted from the system time that is
sent to the service processor (Advanced System Management Processor) each
time the server is started. Use the number keys to enter the hours and minutes
and + or − to add or subtract from the system time. If the system clock time should
be the same as the Advanced System Management Processor clock time, leave
the value set at the default of 0.
The Date and Time choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu.
System Security
To control access to the information in your server databases, you can implement
two levels of password protection. Implementing these security measures helps
you to ensure the integrity of the data and programs that are stored in your server.
Note: The default values for all security-related data fields are given in Table 12
on page 165.
After you set a power-on password, you can enable the unattended-start mode.
This locks the keyboard and mouse, but allows the system to start the operating
system. The keyboard and mouse remain locked until you enter the correct
password.
The System Security choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
After you set a power-on or administrator password, you must enter the password
when you turn on the server. (The passwords do not appear on the screen as you
type them.)
22
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
Type of Password
Results
No password set
Ÿ No password required to start the system.
Ÿ You can access all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
Power-on password only
Ÿ You must enter the password to complete the system startup.
Ÿ You can access all choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
Administrator password only
Ÿ No password is required to start the system.
Ÿ You must enter the password to access the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Ÿ The Administrator password provides access to all choices on
the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu.
Administrator and power-on
password
You can enter either password to complete the system startup.
Ÿ The administrator password provides access to all choices on
the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. You can set,
change, or delete both the administrator and power-on
passwords, and allow a power-on password to be changed by
the user.
Ÿ The power-on password provides access to a limited set of
choices on the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. This
limited access might include changing or deleting the power-on
password.
Ÿ If you forget the power-on password, and the administrator
password has been set, use the administrator password at the
power-on password prompt; then, start the Configuration/Setup
Utility program and change the power-on password.
Using the power-on password menu
When a power-on password is set, you must enter a password each time that you
start the system.
When a power-on password is set, POST does not complete until you enter the
password. If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the
server through one of the following methods:
Ÿ If an administrator password has been set, enter the administrator password at
the power-on prompt. (If necessary, see “Using the administrator password
menu” on page 24 for details.) Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program
and change the power-on password as previously described in this section (see
steps 1 through 5 on page 24).
Ÿ You can change the position of the password override switch (switch 4 of
switch block 2) to the ON position as described in “Bypassing an unknown
power-on password” on page 176.
Ÿ You can remove the battery as described in “Replacing the battery” on
page 159 and then install the battery.
To set a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password menu appears.
2. Type the password in the Enter Power-on Password data field.
You can use any combination of up to seven characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9)
for your power-on password. Keep a record of your password in a secure
place.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
23
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Power-on Password Again data field and type
the password again.
Note: A message appears if the two passwords do not match. If this
happens, press Esc to cancel the request and return to the System
Security menu.
4. If a message appears telling you to select another password, press Enter to
return to the Power-On Password menu. Choose a different password to use
for your power-on password.
5. Select Change Power-on Password to save the new password; then, press
Enter.
To delete a power-on password:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password menu appears.
2. Select Delete Power-on Password; then, press Enter.
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to delete the power-on password.
Press Esc to cancel the request and return to the System Security menu.
To allow the system to start in unattended-start mode when a power-on
password is set:
1. Select Power-on Password from the System Security menu; then, press Enter.
The Power-on Password screen appears.
2. Select Allow for unattended boot with password.
Press the Left Arrow (←) key or Right Arrow (→) key to toggle the entry to On.
Note: The Allow for unattended boot with password data field must be set
to On for the system to support locally or remotely scheduled system
shutdowns or restarts in unattended-start mode.
Using the administrator password menu
The administrator password (sometimes called a supervisor-level password)
controls access to some features of the server, including the Configuration/Setup
Utility program.
Attention:
If an administrator password is set and then forgotten, it cannot be overridden
or removed. You must replace the system board.
24
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
To set an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu: then, press
Enter.
The Administrator Password menu appears.
2. Type the password in the Enter Administrator Password data field.
A password can contain any combination of up to seven alphanumeric
characters (A–Z, a–z, and 0–9). Keep a record of your password in a secure
place.
3. Move the cursor to the Enter Administrator Password Again data field and
type the password again.
Note: A message appears if the two passwords do not match. If this
happens, press Esc to cancel the request and return to the System
Security menu.
4. If a message appears telling you to select another password, press Enter to
return to the Administrator Password menu. Choose a different password to
use for your administrator password.
5. Select Change Administrator Password to save the new password; then,
press Enter. The password becomes effective immediately.
To delete an administrator password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu; then, press
Enter.
The Administrator Password menu appears.
2. Select Delete Administrator Password; then, press Enter.
3. A confirmation window appears. Press Enter to delete the administrator
password. Press Esc to return to the System Security menu.
To enable a user to change the power-on password:
1. Select Administrator Password from the System Security menu; then, press
Enter.
The Administrator Password screen appears.
2. Select Power-on password changeable by user. Press the Left Arrow (←) or
Right Arrow (→) key to toggle the entry to Yes.
When this choice is enabled, System Security appears on the limited
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu. The System Security menu contains the
Power-on Password choice.
Defining a system owner's name
You can specify a system owner's name that displays during POST. The system
owner's name can only be removed or changed from the System Security menu. If
you set an administrator password, only the administrator can set, change, or
delete the system owner's name.
To set the system owner's name:
1. Select System Owner's Name from the System Security screen, and press
Enter.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
25
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
2. Enter the name in the Enter system owner's name string data field.
3. Press the Down Arrow (↓) key to select the Set or change system owner's
name data field.
4. Press Enter to set the name or change a previously defined name.
You can use any combination of up to 16 characters in the system owner's name.
To delete the system owner's name, select Delete stored system owners name;
then, press Enter.
Start Options
Start options take effect when you start your server.
You can select keyboard operating characteristics, such as the keyboard speed.
You also can specify whether the keyboard number lock starts on or off. You also
can enable the server to run without a diskette drive, monitor, or keyboard.
The server uses a startup sequence to determine the device from which the
operating system loads. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a startable diskette in the diskette drive, then checks the hard disk drive
in bay 1, and then checks a network adapter.
You can also select which PCI SCSI adapter is given boot precedence. The first
drive that is attached to the selected adapter will be assigned drive number 80L
and the operating system will start from that drive. The default for boot precedence
is Disabled. The range of choices depends upon the number of PCI SCSI adapters
installed in the server.
You can enable a virus-detection test that checks for changes in the master boot
record at startup. You also can choose to run POST in the enhanced mode or the
quick mode.
Select Start Options; then, use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
advance through each data field.
The Start Options choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility main
menu.
Advanced Setup
Select Advanced Setup to change values for advanced hardware features, such
as cache control, and PCI configuration.
A warning message displays above the choices on this menu, to alert you that the
system might malfunction if these options are configured incorrectly. Follow the
instructions on the screen carefully.
Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to scroll through each data field
after you select one of the setup options.
The Advanced Setup choice appears only on the full Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu.
26
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
Processor Serial Number Access
Select this choice to identify if the microprocessor serial number in the
microprocessor is readable.
Core Chipset Control
Select this choice to modify settings that control features of the core chip set on the
system board. Do not make changes here unless directed to do so by an IBM
authorized service representative.
Cache Control
Select this choice to enable or disable the microprocessor cache. In addition, you
can define the microprocessor cache type as write-back (WB) or write-through
(WT). Selecting write-back mode will provide the maximum system performance.
PCI Slot/Device Information
Select this choice to view and identify system resources used by PCI devices. PCI
devices automatically communicate with the server configuration information. This
usually results in automatic configuration of a PCI device. If a conflict does occur,
see “Resolving configuration conflicts” on page 29.
Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to highlight the assignment that you
want to change and press Enter. Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to
select from the list of available choices. An asterisk (*) indicates that more than
one device shares a slot. After making changes, you can select:
Ÿ Save and exit the PCI Utility to save the changes and return to the Advanced
Setup choice.
Ÿ Exit the PCI Utility without saving changes to ignore the changes, restore
the previous settings, and return to the Advanced Setup choice.
Note: You can use the menu selections to save settings or restore settings for the
PCI Slot/Device Information choice only. The Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu selections save settings, restore settings, or load default
settings for all other choices, but not the PCI Slot/Device Information choice.
Your server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI devices.
Because of this technique, you can install a variety of PCI devices that currently do
not support sharing of PCI interrupts (IRQs). Multiple-function PCI devices use
more than one interrupt.
Selecting PCI Device Control allows you to enable or disable the system board
SCSI, video, and Ethernet controllers and the PCI slots.
Ÿ The default setting is Enable for all the controllers and PCI slots. If you select
Disable, the disabled device will not be configured and will be invisible to the
operating system. This is equivalent to unplugging the device.
Ÿ If the on-board SCSI controller is disabled and no other controller and mass
storage device are installed, operating system startup cannot occur.
Ÿ If the video controller is disabled and no video adapter is installed, the server
will have no video capability. However, turning the server off and on three
times results in a default startup that enables video again.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
27
Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
Memory Settings
Select this choice to manually disable or enable a bank of memory.
If a memory error is detected during POST or memory configuration, the server can
automatically disable the failing memory bank and continue operating with reduced
memory capacity. If this occurs, you must manually enable the memory bank after
the problem is corrected. Select Memory Settings from the Advanced Setup
menu; then use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to highlight the bank that
you want to enable. Use the Left Arrow (←) or Right Arrow (→) key to select
Enable.
System Service Processor Settings
Select this choice to view the IRQ used by the Advanced System Management
Processor (system service processor). You can then use the Left Arrow (←) or
Right Arrow (→) key to select the IRQ for the Advanced System Management
Processor from the list of available choices.
Event/Error Logs
Select Event/Error Logs to choose to view either the POST error log or the system
event/error log.
POST Error Log
Select POST Error Log to view the three most recent error codes and messages
that the system generated during POST. You can clear the error log by selecting
Clear error logs.
System Event/Error Log
Select System Event/Error Log to view the system event/error log. The system
event/error log contains all the system error and warning messages that the system
has generated. You can use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) keys to move
between pages in the system event/error log. You can clear the event log by
selecting Clear error logs.
Save Settings
After you make configuration changes, review them to be sure that they contain the
correct information. If the information is correct, select Save Settings to save the
selected changes.
Restore Settings
After you make configuration changes, review them to be sure that they contain the
correct information. If the information is incorrect, or if you do not want to save
these changes, select Restore Settings to delete the changes and restore the
previous settings.
Load Default Settings
If you make configuration changes and then decide that you want to use default
values instead, select Load Default Settings to cancel the changes and restore
the factory settings. See “Installed device records” on page 164 for a listing of the
default configuration values.
28
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Resolving configuration conflicts
Exit Setup
If you have made any changes, you will be asked if you want to save the changes
or exit without saving the changes.
Configuring options
Before installing a new device or program, read the documentation that comes with
it. Reading the instructions helps you to determine the steps that are required for
installation and configuration. The following list provides a preview of the actions
that might be required to configure your server.
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program and record the current
configuration settings.
See “The Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 19.
2. Set jumpers or switches on the server components.
See “Changing jumper positions” on page 171.
3. Set jumpers or switches on the device.
See the instructions that come with the adapter.
4. Install the adapter in the server.
See “Working with adapters” on page 52.
5. Install software programs.
See the installation instructions that come with the software.
6. Resolve configuration conflicts.
See “Resolving configuration conflicts.”
Resolving configuration conflicts
The resources used by your server consist of interrupt requests, direct memory
access, I/O ports addresses, and memory. This information is useful when a
resource configuration conflict occurs.
Conflicts in the configuration occur if:
Ÿ A device is installed that requires the same resource as another device. (For
example, a conflict occurs when two adapters try to write to the same address
space.)
Ÿ A device resource is changed (for example, changing jumper settings).
Ÿ A device function is changed (for example, assigning COM1 to two serial ports).
Ÿ A software program is installed that requires the same resource as a hardware
device.
The steps required to resolve a configuration error are determined by the number
and variety of hardware devices and software programs that you install. If a
hardware configuration error is detected, a configuration error message appears
after the server completes POST and before the operating system is loaded. You
can bypass the error by pressing Esc while the error message is displayed.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
29
Resolving configuration conflicts
The Configuration/Setup Utility program configures the system hardware and PCI
IRQs. The program does not consider the requirements of the operating system or
the application programs. See “Resolving software configuration conflicts” on
page 30 for additional information.
Resolving hardware configuration conflicts
Use the following information to help resolve hardware configuration conflicts:
1. Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view and change resources
used by the system functions and the installed options. Record the current
settings before making any changes. (See “The Configuration/Setup Utility
program” on page 19 for instructions.)
2. Determine which adapter or device is causing the conflict. (See Chapter 6,
“Solving problems” for instructions.)
3. Change adapter jumpers or switches. Some devices use jumpers and switches
to define the system resources that the devices need. If the settings are
incorrect or set to use a resource that cannot be shared, a conflict occurs and
the device will remain deactivated by the configuration program.
4. Change system jumpers or switches. See “Changing jumper positions” on
page 171.
5. Remove the device or adapter. Some configurations are not supported. If you
must remove an adapter, see “Working with adapters” on page 52.
Resolving software configuration conflicts
The memory-address space and IRQs used by some hardware options might
conflict with addresses defined for use through application programs or the
expanded memory specification (EMS). (EMS is used only with DOS.)
If a conflict exists, one or more of the following conditions might exist:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
The system cannot load the operating system.
The system does not work.
An application program does not operate, or it returns an error.
Screen messages indicate a conflict exists.
To resolve conflicts, you can change the software or hardware configuration.
Note: Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view the addresses used by
your server functions. (See “The Configuration/Setup Utility program” on
page 19 for instructions.)
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the addresses used
by the application program or the device driver. You can use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change addresses.
If a device driver is causing a memory-address conflict, refer to your
operating-system documentation or the documentation that comes with the device
drivers.
30
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Using the SCSISelect utility program
Using the SCSISelect utility program
Note: If your server has a RAID adapter installed, use the configuration method
supplied with the RAID adapter to view or change SCSI settings for
attached devices.
Your server comes with a menu-driven configuration utility program, called
SCSISelect, that allows you to view and change SCSI settings.
You can use the SCSISelect Utility program to:
Ÿ View the default SCSI IDs
Ÿ Verify and change configuration conflicts
Ÿ Perform a low-level format on a SCSI hard disk
Starting the SCSISelect Utility program
You can access this program when you start the server. The SCSISelect prompt
appears after the IBM logo appears. Press Ctrl+A immediately after the
SCSISelect prompt appears:
<<< Press <CTRL><A> for SCSISelect Utility! >>>
Note: If an administrator password has been set, a prompt appears asking you to
enter the password to start the SCSISelect Utility program.
You will be prompted to select either channel A (internal) or channel B (external).
Use the Up Arrow (↑) or Down Arrow (↓) key to move the highlight bar to the
various menu choices. Press Esc to return to the previous menu. Also, you can
press the F5 key to switch between color and monochrome modes (if your monitor
permits). To change the settings of the displayed items, follow the directions on the
screen. Then, press Enter.
SCSISelect Utility program choices
The following choices appear on the SCSISelect Utility menu:
Ÿ Configure/View Host Adapter Settings
Ÿ SCSI Disk Utilities
Configure/View Host Adapter Settings
To view or change the SCSI controller settings, select Configure/View Host
Adapter Settings and follow the directions on the screen.
Note: On the SCSISelect Utility menu, the SCSI controller is referred to as the
Host Adapter.
This menu has the following choices:
Ÿ Host Adapter SCSI ID
The assigned SCSI ID of the SCSI controller is 7.
Ÿ SCSI Parity Checking
The assigned value is Enabled.
Ÿ Host Adapter SCSI Termination
The assigned value is Automatic.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
31
Using the SCSISelect utility program
Ÿ Boot Device Options
Select this choice to configure startable device parameters. Before you can
make updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you
want to configure.
Ÿ SCSI Device Configuration
Select this choice to configure SCSI device parameters. Before you can make
updates, you must know the ID of the device whose parameters you want to
configure.
Note:
When the Maximum Sync Transfer Rate is set to 80.0, this value
represents the transfer rate for UltraSCSI devices. When the Maximum
Sync Transfer Rate is set to 80.0, this value represents the transfer
rate for Ultra2 SCSI LVD devices. When the Maximum Sync Transfer
Rate is set to 20.0, this value represents the transfer rate for Fast SCSI
devices.
Ÿ Advanced Configuration Options
Select this choice to view or change the settings for advanced configuration
options. These options include enabling support for large hard disk drives and
support for drives with UltraSCSI speed.
To reset the SCSI controller defaults, press F6; then, follow the directions on the
screen.
SCSI Disk Utilities
To see the IDs that are assigned to each SCSI device or to format a SCSI device,
select SCSI Disk Utilities from the SCSISelect Utility menu.
To use the utility program, select a drive from the list. Read the screens carefully
before making a selection.
Note: If the following screen appears, you might have pressed Ctrl+A before the
selected drives were ready. Restart the server and watch the SCSISelect
messages as each drive spins up. After the drive that you want to view or
format spins up, press Ctrl+A.
32
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Using the SCSISelect utility program
à
ð
Unexpected SCSI Command Failure
Target SCSI ID:
4
SCSI CDB Sent:
ð3 ðð ðð ðð ðE ðð ð7 ðð ð2 ðð
Host Adapter Status:
ððh - No host adapter error
Target Status:
ð2h - Check condition
Sense Key:
ð2h - Not ready
+Sense Code:
ð4h
+Sense Code Qualifier:
ð2h
Press 'Esc' to continue.
á
ñ
Performing a low-level disk format
You can use the Format Disk feature of the SCSISelect Utility program to perform a
low-level format on a hard disk drive.
Depending on the hard disk drive capacity, the Low-Level Format program could
take up to two hours.
When To use the Low-Level Format program
Use the Low-Level Format program:
Ÿ When you are installing software that requires a low-level format
Ÿ When you get recurring messages from the diagnostic tests directing you to run
the Low-Level Format program on the hard disk drive
Ÿ As a last resort before replacing a failing hard disk drive
Note: For information about backing up all of your files, see your operating-system
documentation.
Starting the Low-Level Format program
Attention: The Low-Level Format program erases all data and programs.
Note: If your server has a RAID adapter installed, refer to the RAID adapter
documentation for instructions for performing a low-level format on a hard
disk drive attached to the PCI RAID adapter.
1. If the hard disk is working, make a backup copy of all the files and programs on
the hard disk drive
2. Select Format Disk; then, follow the instructions on the screen.
Note: Hard disks normally contain more tracks than their stated capacity (to
allow for defective tracks). A message appears on the screen if the
defect limit is reached. If this happens, have the system serviced.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
33
Failover for redundant Ethernet
3. To install an operating system after the hard disk drive is formatted, follow the
instructions in the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information” section of
this Server Library.
Configuring the Ethernet controller
Your Netfinity 5600 server comes with an Ethernet controller on the system board.
The Ethernet controller provides 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX support through the
RJ-45 connector on the back of your server. When you connect your server to the
network, the Ethernet controller automatically detects the data-transfer rate
(10 Mbps or 100 Mbps) on the network and then sets the controller to operate at the
appropriate rate. That is, the Ethernet controller will adjust to the network data
rate, whether the data rate is standard Ethernet (10BASE-T), Fast Ethernet
(100BASE-TX), half duplex (HDX), or full duplex (FDX). This process is also
known as auto-negotiating. This auto-negotiation occurs without requiring software
intervention. The controller supports half-duplex (HDX) and full-duplex (FDX)
modes at both speeds.
Note: The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that the cabling in the
network be Category 5 or higher.
The Ethernet controller is a PCI device, and is therefore, a Plug and Play device.
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controller for your operating
system before you use the Ethernet controller. However, you must install a device
driver to enable your operating system to address the Ethernet controller (refer to
the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information” section of this Server Library
or to your operating-system documentation).
For troubleshooting information, see “Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller” on
page 149.
If you need additional Ethernet connections, you can install an Ethernet adapter,
such as the IBM 10/100 PCI Ethernet adapter. Review your network-adapter
documentation for any additional configuration requirements and for troubleshooting
information.
Failover for redundant Ethernet
Your Netfinity 5600 has an integrated Ethernet controller. The IBM Netfinity 10/100
Fault Tolerant Adapter is an optional redundant network interface card (NIC
adapter) that you can install in your server. If you install this NIC adapter and
connect it to the same logical segment as the primary Ethernet controller, you can
configure the server to support a failover function. You can configure either the
integrated Ethernet controller or the NIC adapter as the primary Ethernet controller.
In failover mode, if the primary Ethernet controller detects a link failure, all Ethernet
traffic associated with it is switched to the redundant (secondary) controller. This
switching occurs without any user intervention. When the primary link is restored to
an operational state, the Ethernet traffic switches back to the primary Ethernet
controller. The switch back to the primary Ethernet controller can be automatic or
manually controlled depending on the setup and operating system.
Note that only one controller in the redundant pair is active at any given time. For
example, if the primary Ethernet controller is active, then the secondary Ethernet
controller cannot be used for any other network operation.
34
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Failover for redundant Ethernet
Note: Your operating system determines the maximum number of IBM Netfinity
10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters that you can install in your server. See the
documentation that comes with the adapter for more information.
Special considerations when combining failover and hot-plug
functions
If your operating system supports hot-plug PCI adapters and the optional redundant
NIC adapter is installed in a hot-plug PCI slot, you can replace the NIC adapter
without powering off the server — even if it is the primary Ethernet controller.
Disconnecting the Ethernet cable from the primary Ethernet controller will cause the
Ethernet traffic to be automatically switched to the secondary Ethernet controller.
This can be very useful when a network problem is caused by faulty adapter
hardware or when you want to upgrade the primary adapter hardware.
Note: If the primary adapter is hot-replaced while the Ethernet traffic is being
handled by the secondary Ethernet controller, the traffic does not
automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the primary adapter
comes back online. See “Configuring for failover.”
Configuring for failover
The failover feature currently is supported by OS/2, Windows NT Server, and
IntraNetWare. The setup required for each operating system follows.
OS/2
Note: The OS/2 operating system does not support hot-plug operations.
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with the
adapter and in “Working with adapters” on page 52.
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet Ethernet Family adapter
device driver. (Refer to the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information”
section of this Server Library.)
3. Using the MPTS Utility program, select the driver from the list and select the
Edit button.
Note: Only one driver instance needs to be loaded for each redundant pair of
Ethernet controllers.
4. Change the PermaNet Server Feature keyword to TRUE and specify the
Primary and Standby slots that contain the redundant pair. Refer to “System
board component locations” on page 173 for the locations and slot numbers of
the PCI slots. The integrated controller is located in slot 2 (PCI bus A slot 2).
5. To enable the writing of messages to the IBMCOM\LANTRAN.LOG file when a
failover occurs:
a. Copy the file PCNETOS2.EXE from the root directory of the diskette
created using the ServerGuide CDs to your hard disk drive.
b. Add the following statement to the CONFIG.SYS file:
Run=d:\path\PCNETOS2.EXE
where d and path are the drive and path to which you copied
PCNETOS2.EXE.
6. Restart the server.
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
35
Failover for redundant Ethernet
The failover function is now enabled.
Windows NT Server
IBM offers hot-plug support for Windows NT Server Version 4.0. Failover can work
in conjunction with hot-plug support or independently. If you are not using hot-plug
support, go to “Windows NT Server failover setup” on page 37.
Windows NT Server hot-plug setup: IBM Netfinity Hot Plug PCI for Windows
NT Server 4.0 package is available for download from the IBM Web site at:
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support
Enter the brand type of Server, click on Downloadable files and look for Hot
Plug. The IBM Netfinity Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package uses
the Intel Desktop Management Interface (DMI) to control hot-plug support for the
Ethernet controllers. The Ethernet controller in your computer is DMI compliant.
Download and install the following software in the order listed:
1. IBM Failover DMI Agent
2. IBM PCI Hot Plug Solution
3. IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter device drivers
Note: The order of installation is important. The IBM Netfinity Hot Plug for
Windows NT Server 4.0 package must be installed before the IBM Netfinity
10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter driver is installed. If the adapter device
driver is installed before the PCI Hot Plug Solution package, the adapter
device driver will not recognize the hot-plug code. This happens because
the adapter device driver only checks the NT registry for the Hot Plug
package during installation. If the PCI Hot Plug Solution package is added
after the adapter device driver is installed, the adapter must be removed
and added again in order for it to detect the PCI Hot-Plug Solution code.
To install the IBM Failover DMI Agent:
1. Download the DMI EXE file from the Netfinity Support web page and extract
the files onto a diskette.
2. Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.
3. From the Start menu, select the Run option.
4. Type A:\SETUP.EXE in the Open box.
5. Click Ok. The setup wizard opens.
6. Follow the instructions given by the setup wizard until the program is installed.
7. Restart the server.
To install the IBM PCI Hot Plug Solution package:
1. Download the IBM PCI Hot Plug Services EXE file from the Netfinity Support
web page and extract the files onto a diskette.
2. Log on to Windows NT Server as a user in the Administrator group.
3. Insert the diskette into the diskette drive.
4. From the Start menu, select the Run option.
5. Type A:\SETUP.EXE in the Open box.
6. Click OK. The Setup wizard opens.
36
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Failover for redundant Ethernet
7. Follow the instructions given by the setup wizard until the program is installed.
Windows NT Server failover setup: To install the IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault
Tolerant Adapter device drivers:
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with the
adapter and in “Working with adapters” on page 52.
2. Use the ServerGuide CDs to install the AMD PCNet Ethernet Family adapter
device driver. (Refer to the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information”
section of this Server Library.)
3. Do not select the Grouping box at this point; you must first restart the machine.
4. From the Windows NT Server desktop, select Control Panel, then select the
Network icon, then select the Adapters tab.
5. Highlight one of the adapters that will be in the redundant pair and then click
the Properties... button.
6. Check the Grouping box. This will show the possible combinations for
redundant pairs.
7. Select the adapter pair you want and then select OK. Note that the integrated
Ethernet controller is located at PCI bus A, slot 2.
Two options are available for recovering from a failover condition. The options
are determined by the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox. If the
IBM Netfinity Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package is installed, this
checkbox will appear at the bottom of the Adapter Properties panel. If you do
not have the IBM Netfinity Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT Server 4.0 package
installed on your server, you will not see the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap
Support checkbox.
If the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is not checked or is not
present, traffic will automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the
primary link status is restored. In this mode, the adapter cannot be
hot-swapped. Users with the IBM Netfinity Hot Plug PCI for Windows NT
Server 4.0 package installed should check the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap
Support checkbox.
If the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is checked, traffic will
remain on the secondary adapter until the user directs it to return to the primary
adapter. This can be done after the hot-swap replacement of the primary
adapter or by using the DMI interface.
8. Select Close to exit from the Network setup.
When you restart the server, the failover function will be in effect.
If a failover occurs, a message is written to the NT Event Viewer log. In addition, if
the Enable for DMI / Hot Swap Support checkbox is checked, a DMI alert will also
be generated.
IntraNetWare
1. Add the redundant NIC adapter according to the instructions provided with the
adapter and in “Working with adapters” on page 52.
2. Load the device driver by using the following command:
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW.LAN PRIMARY=x SECONDARY=y
Chapter 3. Configuring your server
37
Failover for redundant Ethernet
where d and path are the drive and path where the driver is located, and x and
y are the PCI slot numbers where the redundant pair is located.
The slot number associated with the integrated Ethernet controller can vary
depending upon the configuration of the server. To determine the slot number,
load the driver with no parameters. The driver will display the available slot
numbers. The slot number that is greater that 10000 will be the slot number of
integrated Ethernet controller. When the slot number of the integrated Ethernet
controller is determined, reload the driver with the appropriate parameters.
3. When the driver is loaded, bind it to a protocol stack.
The failover function is now enabled. If a failover occurs:
Ÿ A message is generated to the operating system console.
Ÿ The custom counters for the device driver contains variables that define the
state of the failover function and the location of the redundant pair. You can
use the NetWare Monitor to view the custom counters.
Note: If the primary adapter was hot-replaced while the Ethernet traffic was being
handled by the secondary Ethernet controller, the traffic does not
automatically switch back to the primary adapter when the primary adapter
comes back online. In this case, issue the command:
LOAD d:\path\PCNTNW
SCAN
where d and path are the drive and path where the driver is located. This
command causes the device driver to locate the primary adapter and switch
the Ethernet traffic to it.
38
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Chapter 4. Installing options
This chapter provides instructions to help you add options to your server. Some
option-removal instructions are provided, in case you need to remove one option to
install another.
Note: The illustrations in this book are similar to your server; details might vary.
This chapter contains:
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System reliability considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working inside a Netfinity 5600 server with power on . . . . . . . . . .
Preparing to install options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the left-side cover (tower model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the cover (rack model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing the server door (tower model)
Removing the trim bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Working with adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs for hot-plug PCI slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling hot-plug PCI support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a non-hot-plug adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special considerations for installing a RAID adapter . . . . . . . . .
Verifying compatibility between network adapters and device drivers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a microprocessor kit
Installing memory-module kits
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing internal drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal drive bays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SCSI drives
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preinstallation steps (all bays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a non-hot-swap drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a drive in a hot-swap bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a drive in a hot-swap bay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing the installation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing the tower model installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Completing the rack model installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Updating device records and reconfiguring the server . . . . . . . .
Connecting external options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting external SCSI devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input/output ports and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
40
41
42
42
43
43
47
48
49
50
52
53
54
54
55
59
60
60
61
64
66
66
68
69
69
72
75
78
80
82
84
84
87
88
89
89
90
39
Before you begin
Before you begin to install options in your server, read the following information:
Notes:
1. Become familiar with the safety and handling guidelines specified under “Safety
information statements” on page vii, “Electrical safety” on page 41 and
“Handling static-sensitive devices” on page 42. These guidelines will help you
work safely while working with your server or options.
2. You do not need to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap drives, hot-swap fans, or hot-plug PCI adapters.
3. The orange color on components and labels in your server indicates hot-swap
or hot-plug components. This means that you can install or remove the
component while the system is running, provided that your system is configured
to support this function. For complete details about installing or removing a
hot-swap or hot-plug component, see the information provided in this chapter.
4. The blue color on components and labels indicates touch points where a
component and can be gripped, a latch moved, and so on.
5. Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for your server, monitor, and any other options that you intend to install.
6. Place your server in a location that is dry. Rain or spilled liquids might damage
your server.
7. Be sure to leave space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly.
Ÿ On a tower model, leave about 127 mm (5 in.) of space around the front
and rear of the server.
Ÿ On a rack model, refer to the documentation that comes with the rack.
8. Leave about 50 mm (2 inches) of ventilated space on the right and left sides of
the server to allow the server cooling system to work properly. Leave 100 mm
(4 inches) of clearance at the rear of the server for cables.
9. Have a supply of 1 MB and 2 MB, 3.5-inch diskettes available.
10. Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
11. Have a small, flat-blade screwdriver available.
12. For a list of supported options for the Netfinity 5600 server, refer to
http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat on the World Wide Web.
40
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Electrical safety
Electrical safety
For your safety, do the following before removing the cover:
Note: You do not need to turn off the server and attached devices before you
remove the cover to install or remove a hot-plug PCI adapter (see
“Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter” on page 55), to replace a hot-swap
fan (see “Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly” on page 82), or to check
the diagnostic LED panel.
1. Turn off the server and any attached devices, such as printers, monitors, and
external drives.
2. Unplug all the power cords from electrical outlets.
3. Disconnect all communication cables from external receptacles.
4. Disconnect all cables and power cords from the back of the server.
Note: Reconnect the cables or power cords only after you reassemble the
server and put the cover back on.
8
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts
inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these
parts, contact a service technician.
Chapter 4. Installing options
41
Handling static-sensitive devices
Static electricity, though harmless to you, can seriously damage server components
or options.
Note: When you are adding an internal option, do not open the static-protective
package containing the option until you are instructed to do so.
When you handle options and other server components, take these precautions to
avoid damage from static electricity:
Ÿ Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
Ÿ Always handle components carefully. Handle adapters and memory modules
(DIMMs) by the edges. Never touch any exposed circuitry.
Ÿ Prevent others from touching components.
Ÿ When you are installing a new option, touch the static-protective package
containing the option to a metal expansion-slot screw or other unpainted metal
surface on the server for at least two seconds. (This reduces static electricity
from the package and from your body.)
Ÿ When possible, remove the option and install it directly into the server without
setting the option down. When this is not possible, place the static-protective
package that the option comes in on a smooth, level surface and place the
option on it.
Ÿ Do not place the option on the server's covers or any metal surface.
System reliability considerations
To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure:
Ÿ Each of the drive bays has either a drive or a filler panel installed.
Ÿ Each of the power supply bays has either a power supply or a filler panel
installed.
Ÿ The cover is in place during normal operation.
Note: The front door (tower model) can be permanently removed without
affecting system reliability.
Ÿ Be sure to leave space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly.
– On a tower model, leave about 127 mm (5 in.) of space around the front
and rear of the server.
– On a rack model, refer to the documentation that comes with the rack.
Ÿ The cover is removed for no longer than 30 minutes while the server is
operating.
Ÿ A removed hot-swap drive is replaced within two minutes of removal.
Ÿ Cables for optional adapters are routed according to the instructions provided
with the adapters.
Ÿ A failed fan is replaced within 48 hours.
42
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Preparing to install options
Working inside a Netfinity 5600 server with power on
Your Netfinity 5600 server is designed with special features that make it highly
available. These features include hot-plug PCI expansion slots and hot-swap fans.
You can add or replace PCI adapters (if supported by your operating system) or
replace a fan which no longer functions. In the past you would need to power off
the server and disconnect power to perform these operations. With the hot-plug
features you remove the cover of your server with the power on — something most
people have not done before.
Your Netfinity 5600 server is designed to operate safely while powered on with the
cover removed. The server is designed to protect you and the server. Here are
some simple guidelines to follow when you work inside a Netfinity 5600 server that
is powered on:
Ÿ Avoid loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts before
working inside the server; do not wear cufflinks while you are working inside the
server.
Ÿ Do not allow your necktie to hang inside the server.
Ÿ Remove jewelry, such as bracelets and loose-fitting wrist watches.
Ÿ Remove items from your shirt pocket (such as pens or pencils) that could fall
into the server as you lean over it.
Ÿ Take care to avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hair pins,
or screws, into the server.
Preparing to install options
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 41, “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 42, and “Working inside a Netfinity 5600 server with power on.”
Note: You do not need to turn off the server to work with hot-plug or hot-swap
devices, such as hot-plug PCI adapters, hot-swap hard disk drives,
hot-swap power supplies, and hot-swap fans.
If you are:
Ÿ Installing or removing a hot-plug PCI adapter, go to “Working with adapters” on
page 52.
Ÿ Installing or replacing a hot-swap hard disk drive, go to “Installing internal
drives” on page 66.
Ÿ Installing or replacing a hot-swap power supply, go to “Installing a hot-swap
power supply” on page 78.
Ÿ Removing a hot-swap power supply, go to “Removing a hot-swap power
supply” on page 80.
Ÿ Replacing a hot-swap fan, go to “Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly” on
page 82.
Ÿ Installing or removing an option not listed in the preceding list, continue with the
following steps.
Chapter 4. Installing options
43
Preparing to install options
1. Unlock and open the server door.
7
CAUTION:
If the device has doors, be sure to remove or secure the doors
before moving or lifting the device to avoid personal injury. The
doors will not support the weight of the device.
2. Remove all media (diskettes, CDs, optical discs, or tapes) from the drives; then,
turn off the server and all attached options.
5
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on
the power supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to
the device. The device also might have more than one power cord.
To remove all electrical current from the device, ensure that all
power cords are disconnected from the power source.
2
1
3. Unplug all power cords (cables) from electrical outlets.
4. Note the location of the remaining cables and cords; then disconnect them from
the back of the server.
44
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Preparing to install options
1
DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication
cables is hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
– Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform
installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product
during an electrical storm.
– Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded
electrical outlet.
– Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be
attached to this product.
– When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect
signal cables.
– Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire,
water, or structural damage.
– Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications
systems, networks, and modems before you open the
device covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation
and configuration procedures.
– Connect and disconnect cables as described in the
following table when installing, moving, or opening covers
on this product or attached devices.
To Connect:
To Disconnect:
1. Turn everything OFF.
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to devices.
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet.
4. Remove all cables from devices.
5. Turn device ON.
Chapter 4. Installing options
45
Preparing to install options
If you are:
Ÿ Installing or removing a non-hot-plug adapter, go to “Working with adapters” on
page 52.
Ÿ Installing or removing a microprocessor, go to “Installing a microprocessor kit”
on page 61.
Ÿ Installing or removing a memory-module kit, go to “Installing memory-module
kits” on page 64.
Ÿ Installing or removing a drive in a non-hot-swap drive bay, go to “Installing
internal drives” on page 66.
46
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Removing the left-side cover (tower model).
Removing the left-side cover (tower model)
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 42.
Note: The illustrations in this book are similar to your server; details might vary.
CP
U
VR
M
ME
MO
PC
RY
I BU
S
A
B
PO
WE
R
1
2
SU
PP
LY
3
FA
N
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
NO
N
1
2
3
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RE
DU
ND
AN
T
TE
MP
ER
AT
UR
E
.1/ Cover-release latch
.2/ Cover
To remove the left-side cover of the tower model or the top cover of the rack
model:
1. If you are planning to install or remove any part other than a hot-swap hard
disk drive, hot-plug adapter, hot-swap power supply, or hot-swap fan, turn off
the server and all attached devices and disconnect all external cables and
power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43).
2. Slide the cover-release lever .1/ on the front of the server to release the cover
and slide the cover .2/ toward the rear of the server about 25 mm (1 inch).
Move the top edge of the cover out from the server; then, lift the cover off the
server. Set the cover aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before turning on
the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (over 30 minutes)
with the cover removed might damage server components.
Chapter 4. Installing options
47
Removing the cover (rack model)
Removing the cover (rack model)
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 42.
Note: The illustrations in this book are similar to your server; details might vary.
.1/ Top cover
.2/ Side latches
.3/ Cover-release latch
To remove the server top cover:
1. If you are planning to install or remove any part other than a hot-swap hard
disk drive, hot-plug adapter, hot-swap power supply, or hot-swap fan, turn off
the server and all attached devices and disconnect all external cables and
power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43).
2. Release the left and right side latches .2/ and pull the server out of the rack
enclosure until both slide rails lock.
Note: When the server is in the locked position, you can easily reach the
cables on the back of the server.
3. Move the cover-release lever .3/ down while sliding the top cover .1/ toward
the rear of the server about 25 mm (1 inch). Lift the cover off the server and
set the cover aside.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before turning on
the server. Operating the server for extended periods of time (over 30 minutes)
with the cover removed might damage server components.
48
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Removing the server door (tower model)
Removing the server door (tower model)
Refer to the following illustration while you perform the steps in this procedure.
1
CPU
VR
M
MEM
PC
I BU
ORY
HD
S
D
A
B
PO
W
ER
SU
1
2
3
FA
PP
LY
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVI
S CE
NO
N
N
RED
1
PR
OC
UN
2
ES
DAN
3
TE
MPE
RAT
UR
SO
R
T
E
2
.1/ Flange
.2/ Server door
To remove the server door:
1. Unlock and open the server door .2/.
2. Locate the flange .1/ on the top edge of the door.
3. Press down on the flange while pressing out on the door; then lift the server
door up and off the hinge. Set the door aside in a safe place.
Chapter 4. Installing options
49
Removing the trim bezel
Removing the trim bezel
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the steps in this procedure.
Tower model
CP
U
VR
M
MEM
PC
I BU
ORY
HD
S
D
A
B
PO
W
NM
SM
ER
SU
1
2
3
FA
PP
LY
NO
N
I
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
N
RE
1
2
PR
OCE
DU
ND
AN
3
TE
MPE
RA
TU
SS
2
OR
T
RE
3
50
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Removing the trim bezel
Rack model
.1/ Bezel-release lever
.2/ Trim bezel
.3/ Side with bezel tabs and slots
To remove the trim bezel:
1. Move the blue bezel release lever .1/ following the curve of the lever opening.
2. Lift the bezel tabs out of the slots .3/ and pull the bezel .2/ away from the
server front. Store the bezel in a safe place.
Chapter 4. Installing options
51
Working with adapters
Working with adapters
You can add adapters to extend the capabilities and power of your server. Many
adapters provide bus-master capabilities, which enable the adapters to perform
operations without interrupting the server's microprocessor.
You can install up to five peripheral component interconnect (PCI) adapters in the
expansion connectors, called slots, on the system board of your server.
In three of the PCI slots, you can install a new PCI adapter or replace an existing
PCI adapter with the same type of adapter without turning off the server power and
restarting the system, if these features are supported by your operating system.
These slots are called hot-pluggable PCI slots. They are also referred to as
hot-plug PCI slots.
The two remaining PCI slots support standard (non-hot-plug) PCI adapters. PCI
Your server comes with a video controller. This video controller is an integrated
component on the system board. It is not in an expansion slot. The integrated
video controller has super video graphics array (SVGA) technology.
The integrated video controller is not removable. If you want to disable this
controller and use a video adapter instead, you can install a video adapter in an
expansion slot. When you install a video adapter, the server BIOS automatically
disables the integrated video controller.
52
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Working with adapters
The following illustration shows the location of the PCI expansion slots on the
system board.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
Non-hot-plug 32-bit PCI slots 1 and 2 (on PCI bus A)
Hot-plug 64-bit PCI slots 3–5 (on PCI bus B)
Power LEDs for hot-swap slots
Internal Attention LEDs for hot-swap slots
External Attention LEDs for hot-swap slots
LEDs for hot-plug PCI slots
Each hot-plug PCI slot has three LEDs associated with it — two Attention LEDs
and one Power LED.
Ÿ Power LED: This LED is on when the hot-plug PCI slot is active and has
power. An adapter must not be added to or removed from the PCI slot when
the Power LED is on. When this LED is off, the PCI slot is inactive and has no
power applied. An adapter can be installed when the Power LED for the PCI
slot is off. Refer to your operating system documentation to determine if it
supports hot-plug PCI adapters, and, if so, how to disable the hot-plug PCI slot.
Ÿ Attention LEDs: Each hot-plug PCI slot has an Attention LED that is visible
from the rear of the server and one that can be seen from inside the server.
(The LEDs have the same meaning; they are duplicated to be visible from
outside or inside the server.) An Attention LED flashes approximately once per
second when it is on. The meaning of the Attention LEDs is defined by your
operating system. Refer to your operating system documentation to determine
if it supports hot-plug PCI adapters and, if so, what the Attention LEDs indicate.
Chapter 4. Installing options
53
Working with adapters
:.The following table describes the LEDs:
Power LED
Attention LED
Description
On
Flashing
The adapter requires attention. Slot still has
power applied. Do not remove or install an
adapter in the slot. Refer to your operating
system documentation for instructions.
On
Off
Normal operation; no intervention is required.
Off
Flashing
The adapter requires intervention. Power is
removed from the slot. An adapter can be
removed or installed in the slot.
Off
Off
Power is removed from the slot. An adapter
can be removed or installed in the slot.
Adapter considerations
Before you continue with the adapter-installation procedure:
Ÿ Review the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions given in this chapter. If you need to
change the switch or jumper settings on your adapter, follow the instructions
that come with the adapter documentation.
Ÿ You can install full-length adapters in all expansion slots.
Ÿ You can install hot-plug PCI adapters in PCI slots 3–5, if your operating system
supports this feature. Non-hot-plug PCI adapters can also be installed in these
slots.
Ÿ Your server supports 5.0 V and universal PCI adapters; it does not support
3.3 V adapters.
Note: A universal PCI adapter supports both 3.3 V and 5.0 V operation.
Ÿ Your server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI adapters.
Because of this technique, you can install a variety of PCI adapters that
currently do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
Ÿ PCI slots 1 and 2 are on PCI bus A and PCI slots 3–5 are on PCI bus B. Both
PCI buses are primary buses. The system scans PCI slots 1 through 5 to
assign system resources; then the system starts (boots) the PCI devices in the
following order, if the default boot precedence has not been changed: PCI
slots 1 and 2, system board SCSI devices, and then PCI slots 3 through 5.
See“Start Options” on page 26 for information about changing the boot
precedence.
Note: The performance of the PCI adapters depends on the configuration of
adapters in your system.
Enabling hot-plug PCI support
Your Netfinity 5600 server has hot-plug PCI capability. In order to enable this
feature, you must install the operating system services for hot-plug PCI support
code. To obtain the operating system hot-plug PCI support code, access the IBM
Web site at:
http://www.ibm.com/pc/support
Click on IBM Server Support. From the select family field, click on Netfinity
5600. Click on Downloadable files.
54
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Working with adapters
Attention: All hot-plug operations must be done through the operating system
console (or supported user interface). Failure to do this can result in a system
hang or serious damage to the adapter card or system unit.
Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter
This section gives the procedure for installing a hot-plug PCI adapter. If you want
to remove a hot-plug adapter, reverse the steps. If your operating system supports
hot-replace PCI adapters, you can replace a failing hot-plug PCI adapter with a new
adapter of the same type without turning off power to the server. If your operating
system and adapter also support the hot-add feature, you can install a new adapter
without turning off the power to the server.
Note: You do not need to turn the server off to install or remove a hot-plug PCI
adapter.
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with your adapter for any special
requirements or restrictions.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with your operating system.
Attention: Do not remove a hot-plug adapter before performing the
operating-system-defined procedure for disabling the hot-plug PCI slot that contains
the adapter. Failure to do so might cause your system to lock up. Refer to your
operating system documentation.
Chapter 4. Installing options
55
Working with adapters
Refer to the following illustrations of the rack model while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
56
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Working with adapters
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
.9/
Expansion-slot cover
Tab
Adapter retention latch
Adapter retention flap
Plastic divider
Power light
Attention light
Adapter
SCSI cable extender
To install a hot-plug PCI adapter:
1. Remove the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on
page 47 or “Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 48.
2. Determine which PCI adapter expansion slot you will use for the adapter.
Note: Only PCI slots 3–5 can be used for hot-plug PCI adapters.
3. Disable the selected PCI slot from your operating system. (Refer to the
documentation that comes with your operating system for information about
disabling a hot-plug PCI slot.) Disabling the PCI slot turns off the Power light
for that PCI slot.
Attention: Make sure the Power light .6/ for the hot-plug PCI slot is off
before you continue to the next step.
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover .1/:
a. Rotate the adapter retention latch .3/ counterclockwise.
b. Lift the tab .2/ covering the top of the expansion-slot cover .1/ and then
remove the expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place
for future use.
Chapter 4. Installing options
57
Working with adapters
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots.
This maintains the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the system
and ensures proper cooling of system components.
5. Refer to the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install
the adapter.
6. Press on the touchpoint on the adapter retainer flap .4/ at the end of the slot
nearest the front of the server and rotate the adapter retainer flap upward.
7. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
adapter.
8. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat, static-protective surface.
9. Install the adapter .8/:
a. Carefully grasp the adapter .8/ by its top edge or upper corners, and align
it with the expansion slot on the system board.
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is
completely and correctly seated in the system-board connector. Incomplete
insertion might cause damage to the system board or the adapter.
c. Lower the tab .2/ on the adapter guide over the tab on the top corner of
adapter. Rotate the adapter retention latch .3/ clockwise until it snaps into
place.
Attention: Power cannot be restored to the adapter slot if the tab is not
lowered into place.
d. Close the adapter retainer flap .4/.
10. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
Attention: Route cables so that the flow of air from the fans is not blocked.
11. Enable the PCI slot from your operating system. (Refer to the documentation
that comes with your operating system for information about enabling a
hot-plug PCI slot.) Make sure that the Power light .6/ for the hot-plug PCI slot
is on.
12. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 84.
58
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Working with adapters
Installing a non-hot-plug adapter
This section gives the procedure for installing a non-hot-plug adapter. If you want
to remove a non-hot-plug adapter, reverse the steps.
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with your option.
Refer to the illustrations in “Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter” on page 55 while you
perform the steps in this procedure.
To install a non-hot-plug adapter:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43); then remove
the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 47 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 48.
2. Determine which PCI adapter expansion slot you will use for the adapter.
Note: Check the instructions that come with the adapter for any requirements
or restrictions.
3. Remove the expansion-slot cover .1/:
a. Rotate the adapter retention latch .3/ counterclockwise.
b. Remove the expansion-slot cover from the server. Store it in a safe place
for future use.
Attention: Expansion-slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots. This
maintains the electromagnetic emissions characteristics of the system and
ensures proper cooling of system components.
4. Refer to the documentation that comes with your adapter for any cabling
instructions. It might be easier for you to route any cables before you install
the adapter.
5. Press on the touchpoint on the adapter retainer flap .4/ at the end of the slot
nearest the front of the server and rotate the adapter retainer flap upward.
6. Remove the adapter from the static-protective package.
Attention: Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the
adapter.
7. Place the adapter, component-side up, on a flat, static-protective surface.
8. Set any jumpers or switches as described by the adapter manufacturer.
9. Install the adapter .8/:
a. Carefully grasp the adapter .8/ by its top edge or upper corners, and align
it with the expansion slot on the system board.
b. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention: When you install an adapter in the server, be sure that it is
completely and correctly seated in the system-board connector before you
Chapter 4. Installing options
59
Working with adapters
apply power. Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system
board or the adapter.
c. Lower the tab .2/ on the adapter guide over the tab on the top corner of
the adapter. Rotate the adapter retention latch .3/ clockwise until it snaps
into place.
d. Close the adapter retainer flap .4/.
10. Connect any needed cables to the adapter.
Attention: Route cables so that the flow of air from the fans is not blocked.
11. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 84.
Special considerations for installing a RAID adapter
You can install an optional RAID adapter in your server to control the hot-swap
hard-disk drives.
To install the RAID adapter:
1. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the SCSI cable extender on the system board.
See the illustration in “Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter” on page 55 for the
location of the SCSI cable extender. (The other end of the SCSI cable is
connected to the SCSI HDD backplane.) The Service Label on the inside of
the cover of your server shows cable routing for an optional RAID adapter.
2. Connect the end of the SCSI cable that you disconnected from the SCSI cable
extender to the RAID adapter. The other end of the cable is connected to the
SCSI HDD backplane; the drives in the hot-swap bays are now connected to
the RAID adapter.
3. Connect the 2-drop SCSI cable to the SCSI cable extender on the system
board, and attach the device in the non-hot-swap bay to one of the drops on
the other end of the 2-drop SCSI cable. The device is attached to the
integrated SCSI controller.
Refer to the documentation provided with the RAID adapter for more information
about installing the adapter and configuring a disk array.
Verifying compatibility between network adapters and device drivers
Your server supports several types of network adapters. If you are having trouble
with the installation or operation of a network adapter or network operating system,
ensure that the network-adapter device driver supports up to four processors.
Refer to your network-adapter documentation for additional information about
adapter compatibility requirements.
60
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing a microprocessor kit
Installing a microprocessor kit
Your server comes with one microprocessor installed on the processor board. If
you install an additional microprocessor kit, your server can operate as a symmetric
multiprocessing (SMP) server. With SMP, certain operating systems and
application programs can distribute the processing load between the
microprocessors. This enhances performance for database and point-of-sale
applications, integrated manufacturing solutions, and other applications.
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Thoroughly review the documentation that comes with the microprocessor,
so that you can determine whether you need to update the server basic
input/output system (BIOS). The latest level of BIOS for your server is
available through the World Wide Web and the IBM Bulletin Board System
(BBS). Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section of this
Server Library for the appropriate World Wide Web addresses and
bulletin-board telephone numbers.
Ÿ Obtain an SMP-capable operating system (optional). For a list of supported
operating systems, see http://www.ibm.com/pc/us/compat/ on the World
Wide Web.
Attention: To avoid damage and ensure proper server operation when you install
a new or an additional microprocessor, use microprocessors that have the same
cache size and type, and the same clock speed. Microprocessor internal and
external clock frequencies must be identical.
Notes:
1. The illustrations in this section might differ slightly from your hardware.
2. To order additional microprocessor options, contact your IBM reseller or IBM
marketing representative.
3. The microprocessor that is installed in microprocessor connector U5 is CPU or
processor 1. If a microprocessor is installed in microprocessor connector U6, it
is CPU or processor 2. If the server has only one microprocessor installed, that
microprocessor is installed in microprocessor connector U5 and is the startup
(boot) processor. If more than one microprocessor is installed, the
microprocessor with the lower stepping level is the startup processor and the
microprocessor with the higher stepping level is the application processor. If
both microprocessors have the same stepping level, the microprocessor
installed in microprocessor connector U6 is the startup processor and the
microprocessor installed in U5 is the application processor.
Note: You can determine the stepping levels of the installed microprocessors
using the Configuration/Setup. See “System Summary” on page 21.
Chapter 4. Installing options
61
Installing a microprocessor kit
Refer to the following illustrations while you perform the steps in this section.
6
5
4
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
62
Terminator card
Microprocessor connector 2 (U6)
Voltage regulator module (VRM) connector for second VRM
VRM for first microprocessor (VRM 1)
Microprocessor connector 1 (U5)
Microprocessor 1
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing a microprocessor kit
.7/ Microprocessor handle
.8/ Microprocessor 2
.9/ VRM for second microprocessor (VRM 2)
To install an additional microprocessor kit:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43); then remove
the cover (see “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 47 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 48.)
2. Remove the terminator card .1/ from the microprocessor connector .2/. Store
the terminator card in a safe place in the static-protective package that your
new microprocessor is shipped in; you will need to install it again if you ever
remove the microprocessor.
3. Install the microprocessor:
a. Touch the static-protective package containing the new microprocessor to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the
microprocessor from the package.
b. Center the microprocessor .8/ over the microprocessor connector .2/ and
carefully press the microprocessor into the connector.
4. Install the VRM .9/ included in the microprocessor kit:
Attention: When installing or replacing a VRM, use only VRMs specified for
use with the Netfinity 5600 server. Use of other VRMs might cause your server
to overheat.
a. Center the VRM .9/ over the VRM connector .3/. Make sure that the
VRM is oriented and aligned correctly.
b. Press the VRM into the connector.
Notes:
1) To remove a microprocessor, pull upward on the microprocessor
handle .7/.
2) If you remove the microprocessor later, remember to install the
terminator card in the appropriate microprocessor connector and to
remove the VRM for that microprocessor.
5. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 84.
Chapter 4. Installing options
63
Installing memory-module kits
Installing memory-module kits
Adding memory to your server is an easy way to make programs run faster. You
can increase the amount of memory in your server by installing options called
memory-module kits. Each kit contains one industry-standard, dual-inline memory
module (DIMM). Your server uses a noninterleaved memory configuration.
Your server comes with a DIMM installed on the processor board in connector J1.
Notes:
1. Install additional DIMMs in connectors J2, J3, and J4, in that order. (See the
following illustration for memory connector locations.) If you mix DIMM sizes,
install the largest sized DIMM in connector J1, the next largest sized DIMM in
connector J2, and so forth.
2. Your Netfinity 5600 server supports 128 MB, 256 MB, 512 MB, and 1 GB
DIMMs. Your server supports a minimum of 128 MB and a maximum of 4 GB
of system memory. Only 133 MHz, 3.3 V, 168-pin, 8-byte, 72-bit registered,
synchronous-dynamic-random-access memory (SDRAM), error correcting code
(ECC) with x4 configuration DIMM memory complying with PC 133 Registered
DIMM Specification, Revision 1.0 or later is supported. When installed in
systems using 100 MHz front-side bus processors, the memory operates at
100 MHz.
3. Installing or removing DIMMs changes the configuration information in the
server. Therefore, after installing or removing a DIMM, you must save the new
configuration information in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. When you
restart the server, the system displays a message indicating that the memory
configuration has changed. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and
select Save Settings. See “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu”
on page 20 for more information.
5
4
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
64
3
DIMM
Retaining clips
DIMM connector 1 (J4)
DIMM connector 2 (J3)
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing memory-module kits
.5/ DIMM connector 3 (J2)
.6/ DIMM connector 4 (J1)
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with your option.
To install a DIMM:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43); then remove
the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 47 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 48.
2. Locate the DIMM connectors on the processor board. Determine the DIMM
connector into which you will install the DIMM. (See the notes at the beginning
of this procedure.)
3. Touch the static-protective package containing the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the package.
Note: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM connectors,
handle the clips gently.
4. Install the DIMM:
a. Turn the DIMM .1/ so that the pins align correctly with the connector .5/.
b. Insert the DIMM into the connector by pressing on one edge of the DIMM
and then on the other edge of the DIMM. Be sure to press straight into the
connector. Be sure that the retaining clips .2/ snap into the closed
positions.
c. Make sure the retaining clips are in the closed position. If a gap exists
between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM has not been properly
installed. In this case, open the retaining clips and remove the DIMM; then,
reinsert the DIMM.
d. Repeat these steps for each DIMM that you install.
5. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 84.
Chapter 4. Installing options
65
Installing internal drives
Installing internal drives
Different types of drives allow your system to read multiple types of media and
store more data. Several types of drives are available, such as:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Diskette
Hard disk
CD-ROM
Tape
Internal drive bays
Internal drives are installed in bays. Your server comes with one 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB
diskette drive and one CD-ROM drive.
Tower model
.1/ Diskette drive bay
.2/ SCSI ID 0 bay
.3/ SCSI ID 2 bay
.4/ SCSI ID 3 bay
.5/ SCSI ID 4 bay
.6/ SCSI ID 8 bay
.7/ SCSI ID 9 bay
.8/ Hot-swap bays
.9/ CD-ROM drive bay
.1ð/ Non-hot-swap bay B
.11/ Non-hot-swap bay A
66
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing internal drives
Rack model
.1/ Hot-swap bays
.2/ CD-ROM drive bay
.3/ Non-hot-swap bay B
.4/ Non-hot-swap bay A
.5/ Diskette drive bay B
.6/ SCSI ID 9 bay
.7/ SCSI ID 5 bay
.8/ SCSI ID 4 bay
.9/ SCSI ID 3 bay
.1ð/ SCSI ID 1 bay
.11/ SCSI ID 0 bay
Your server contains hardware that lets you replace a failed hard disk drive without
turning off the server. Therefore, you have the advantage of continuing to operate
your system while a hard disk drive is removed or installed. These drives are
known as hot-swappable drives. They are also referred to as hot-swap drives.
Each hot-swap drive that you plan to install must have a hot-swap-drive tray
attached. The drive must have a single connector attachment (SCA) connector.
Hot-swap-drive trays come with the hot-swap drives.
Ÿ Your server comes with a preinstalled 3.5-inch, 1.44 MB diskette drive and a
preinstalled IDE CD-ROM drive.
Ÿ Bays A and B come without a device installed. These bays are for 5.25-inch,
half-high, removable-media drives, such as tape backup drives. Bays A and B
can be combined into a single full-high bay.
Ÿ
The Netfinity 5600 server supports only one diskette drive.
Note: The server's EMI integrity and cooling are both protected by having
bays A and B covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save the
filler panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not
replace it with another.
Ÿ If you are installing a device with a 50-pin connector in one of the non-hot-swap
bays (bays A–B), you need a 68-pin to 50-pin converter. To order the
converter, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Chapter 4. Installing options
67
Installing internal drives
Ÿ Your server supports six slim (1-inch) or three half-high (1.6-inch), 3.5-inch
hot-swap hard disk drives in the hot-swap bays.
Ÿ The hot-swap bays connect to a SCSI backplane. This backplane is the
printed circuit board behind the bay. The backplane supports up to six hard
disk drives.
Ÿ The diskette drive uses 1 MB and 2 MB diskettes. For optimum use, format
1 MB diskettes to 720 KB and format 2 MB diskettes to 1.44 MB.
SCSI drives
Some drives have a special design called small computer system interface, or
SCSI. This design allows you to attach multiple drives to a single SCSI channel.
Notes:
1. Any information about SCSI drives also applies to other SCSI devices, such as
tape drives.
2. If you plan to install both internal and external SCSI devices, you must follow
the instructions in “Connecting external options” on page 89, in addition to the
instructions in this section.
A 16-bit (wide) SCSI cable connects the SCSI HDD (hard disk drive) backplane to
an integrated SCSI controller on the system board. An additional 16-bit 2-drop
SCSI cable is shipped disconnected inside your server. It is folded and restrained
with a cable clamp to the side of the power supply housing.
If you want to install a device in one of the non-hot-swap bays, you can either:
Ÿ Install an additional SCSI adapter and use the 2-drop SCSI cable to attach the
device to that adapter.
Ÿ Install a RAID adapter as follows:
1. Disconnect the SCSI cable from the SCSI cable extender on the system
board. See the illustration in “Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter” on page 55
for the location of the SCSI cable extender. (The other end of the SCSI
cable is connected to the SCSI HDD backplane.)
2. Connect the end of the SCSI cable that you disconnected from the SCSI
cable extender to the RAID adapter. The other end of the cable is
connected to the SCSI HDD backplane; the drives in the hot-swap bays are
now connected to the RAID adapter.
3. Connect the 2-drop SCSI cable to the SCSI cable extender on the system
board, and attach the device in the non-hot-swap bay to one of the drops
on the other end of the 2-drop SCSI cable. The device is attached to the
integrated SCSI controller.
SCSI IDs
Each SCSI device that is connected to an individual channel of a SCSI controller
needs a unique identification (ID) so that the controller can identify the devices and
ensure that different devices do not attempt to transfer data at the same time. If
you need to set IDs for SCSI devices, refer to the instructions that come with those
devices.
68
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing internal drives
Your server automatically sets SCSI IDs for hot-swap hard disk drives. The SCSI
ID assigned to each hot-swap bay is shown on your server beside the bay and in
the illustrations in “Internal drive bays” on page 66. The server uses the hard disk
drive SCSI IDs to send status information to the indicator lights above each
hot-swap bay.
The SCSI backplane in the server supports up to six hot-swap bays.
The processing sequence for SCSI devices proceeds from the lowest SCSI ID to
the highest (0 to 6, then 8 to 15).
Termination (internal SCSI devices)
SCSI buses must be terminated at each end. The ends of the SCSI buses in your
server are already terminated.
All the hot-swap drives in your server have automatic termination and the SCSI
controller provides termination at the other end of the SCSI bus.
You must disable termination on any SCSI devices that you install in the
non-hot-swap bays. Refer to the information that come with the SCSI device for
instructions about setting device jumpers or switches that control termination.
Preinstallation steps (all bays)
Before you install drives in your server, verify that you have all the cables and any
other equipment specified in the documentation that comes with the internal drive.
You might also need to perform certain preinstallation activities. Some of the steps
are required only during the initial installation of an option.
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with the internal drive.
1. Choose the bay in which you want to install the drive.
2. Check the instructions that come with the drive to see if you need to set any
switches or jumpers on the drive.
3. To install the drive, go to “Installing a non-hot-swap drive” or “Installing a drive
in a hot-swap bay” on page 72.
Installing a non-hot-swap drive
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with your drive.
Ÿ Prepare the drive for installation (see “Preinstallation steps (all bays)”).
Note: The server's EMI integrity and cooling are both protected by having the
non-hot-swap bays covered or occupied. When you install a drive, save the
Chapter 4. Installing options
69
Installing internal drives
filler panel from the bay, in case you later remove the drive and do not
replace it with another.
Refer to the following illustration of the tower model while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
CP
U
VR
M
ME
MO
PC
RY
I BU
S
A
B
PO
WE
R
1
2
SU
PPL
Y
3
FAN
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SER
BU VIC
S
E
NO
N
1
2
3
PR
OC
ESS
OR
RE
DU
ND
AN
T
TEM
PER
ATU
RE
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
70
DLT drive
Filler panel
Blue slide rails
Metal slide rails
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing internal drives
To install a non-hot-swap drive in one of the non-hot-swap bays:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices (see “Preparing to install options” on
page 43) and then remove the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover
(tower model)” on page 47 or “Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 48.
2. Remove the trim bezel. (See “Removing the trim bezel” on page 50.)
3. Remove the filler panel .2/ from the bay opening by pulling the filler panel
away from the server. You do not need the filler panel when you have a drive
installed in the bay.
4. Touch the static-protective bag containing the drive to any unpainted metal
surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the bag and place it on a
static-protective surface.
5. Set any jumpers or switches on the drive according to the documentation that
comes with the drive.
6. Install rails on the drive.
Ÿ If you are installing a standard-size drive:
a. Pull the blue slide rails .3/ off the back of the filler panel.
b. Clip the rails onto the sides of the drive.
Ÿ If you are installing a digital linear tape (DLT) backup drive .1/, the slide
rails .4/ and screws are included in the country kit.
7. Place the drive so that the slide rails engage in the bay guide rails. Push the
drive into the bay until it clicks into place.
8. If you have not already done so, install an optional SCSI adapter. (See to
“Working with adapters” on page 52 for information about installing an
adapter.) See “SCSI drives” on page 68 for information about optional SCSI
adapters, installation of drives in the non-hot-swap bays, and the 16-bit 2-drop
SCSI cable that is provided for use with optional SCSI adapters.
9. Connect one of the connectors on the SCSI cable for the non-hot-swap drive
bays to the back of the drive .1/.
10. Connect a power cable to the back of the drive. Power cables for
non-hot-swap drives come installed in your server. The connectors are keyed
and can be inserted only one way.
11. If you are installing another non-hot-swap drive, do so at this time. Otherwise,
continue with the next step.
12. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 84.
Chapter 4. Installing options
71
Installing internal drives
Installing a drive in a hot-swap bay
The hot-swap drive bays support hot-swap drives only.
This section gives the procedure for installing a hot-swap hard disk drive. If you
want to remove a drive, reverse the following steps.
Note: To minimize the possibility of damage to the hard disk drives when you are
installing a hard disk drive in a rack model, install the rack model in the rack
before installing the hard disk drives.
Note: You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in these
bays. However, you must turn off the server when performing any steps
that involve installing or removing cables.
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with your drive.
Ÿ If your server has a RAID adapter installed, review the documentation that
came with your RAID adapter for information about the RAID adapter and
disk-array configuration.
Ÿ Prepare the drive for installation (see “Preinstallation steps (all bays)” on
page 69).
Refer to the following illustrations of the tower model while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
72
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing internal drives
.1/ Filler panel for use with half-high drives
.2/ Filler panel (slim-high)
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
NO
N
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RED
UN
DA
NT
TE
MPE
RAT
UR
E
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
Drive
Screws
Drive tray
Drive tray handle (in open position)
Chapter 4. Installing options
73
Installing internal drives
To install a drive in a hot-swap drive bay:
1. If your server is a tower model, unlock and open the server door.
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for
more than two minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed for each
bay.
2. Remove the filler panel .2/ from one of the empty hot-swap bays by inserting
your finger into the depression at the left side of the filler panel and pulling it
away from the server.
Note: If you are installing a half-high hard disk drive, you will need to remove
two adjacent filler panels. The two filler panels should be from either
the top pair of bays, the middle pair of bays, or the bottom pair of bays.
3. If your hard disk drive is not installed on the drive tray .5/, place the drive in
the drive tray and, being careful not to over-tighten the screws, attach the
drive to the tray using the four screws provided with the option kit.
4. Install the hard disk drive .3/ in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure the tray handle .6/ is open (that is, perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive/tray assembly so that it engages the guide rails in the bay.
c. Gently push the drive/tray assembly into the bay until the drive connects to
the backplane.
d. Push the tray handle to the right until it locks.
5. If you installed a half-high hard disk drive, install a filler panel .1/ in the gap
above the drive:
a. Locate the smaller filler panel .1/ that is designed for use with half-high
drives. It is stored on the slim-high filler panel .2/ that you removed earlier
in this procedure.
b. Pull the smaller filler panel off the filler panel.
c. Gently push the filler panel .1/ into place in the gap above the drive.
6. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify that the hard disk drives
are operating properly. See “Identifying problems using status LEDs” on
page 151 for details.
7. If your server is a tower model, close and lock the server door.
Note: If your server has a RAID adapter installed, you must reconfigure your
disk arrays after installing hard disk drives. Record the configuration
information in the appropriate tables in “Installed device records” on
page 164.
74
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing internal drives
Replacing a drive in a hot-swap bay
You do not have to turn off the server to remove a drive from the hot-swap bays.
Attention:
1. Before you remove a hot-swap hard disk drive that is not defective, back up all
important data.
2. To avoid damage to a hard disk drive, DO NOT remove the drive from the
hot-swap bay until it has had time to spin down (approximately 30 seconds).
Handle the drive carefully.
3. Before you hot-swap a drive, make sure it is defective. If you partially or
completely remove a good drive instead of a defective one your server might
lose valuable data.
This situation is especially relevant if your server has a RAID adapter installed
and you assigned RAID level 1 or 5 to the logical drives in your disk array. The
RAID adapter can rebuild the data that you need, provided that certain
conditions are met. Refer to the information provided with the RAID adapter for
further details.
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with your drive.
Ÿ If your server has a RAID adapter installed, review the information provided
with the RAID adapter for information about the RAID adapter and
disk-array configuration.
Ÿ Prepare the drive for installation (see “Preinstallation steps (all bays)” on
page 69).
Chapter 4. Installing options
75
Installing internal drives
Refer to the following illustration of the tower model while you perform the steps in
this procedure.
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
NO
N
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RED
UN
DA
NT
TE
MPE
RAT
UR
E
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
76
Drive
Screws
Drive tray
Drive tray handle (in open position)
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing internal drives
To replace a drive in a hot-swap bay:
1. If your server is a tower model, unlock and open the server door (see
“Preparing to install options” on page 43).
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for
more than two minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed for each
bay.
2. Remove the defective hard disk drive .3/ by placing the handle .6/ on the
drive to the open position (perpendicular to the drive) and pulling the hot-swap
tray from the bay.
3. Remove the four screws .4/ that attach the drive .3/ to the hot-swap tray .5/,
and remove the drive from the tray.
4. Place the new hard disk drive on the hot-swap tray and, being careful not to
over-tighten the screws, attach the drive to the tray using four screws.
5. Install the hard disk drive in the hot-swap bay:
a. Ensure the tray handle is open (that is, perpendicular to the drive).
b. Align the drive/tray assembly so that it engages the guide rails in the bay.
c. Push the drive assembly into the bay until the drive connects to the
backplane.
d. Push the tray handle to the right until it locks.
6. Check the hard disk drive status indicators to verify that the hard disk drive is
installed properly. See “Identifying problems using status LEDs” on page 151
for details.
7. If your server is a tower model, close and lock the server door.
Chapter 4. Installing options
77
Installing a hot-swap power supply
Installing a hot-swap power supply
Your server comes with two power supplies. You can add a third power supply.
After you install a power supply, check the power-supply status indicators to verify
that the power supply is operating properly. See “Power supplies” on page 13 for
details.
8
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts
inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these
parts, contact a service technician.
78
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing a hot-swap power supply
Refer to the following illustration of the tower model while performing the steps in
this procedure.
Note: You do not need to turn off the power to the server to install hot-swap
power supplies.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
Power supply
Filler panel
Cable-restraint bracket
Power cord connector
Handle on power supply (in open position)
AC Power light
DC Power light
Chapter 4. Installing options
79
Removing a hot-swap power supply
To add a power supply:
1. Remove the filler panel .2/ from the empty power supply bay by inserting your
finger into the depression on the filler panel and pulling it away from the server.
Save the filler panel in case you remove the power supply at a later time.
Note: During normal operation, each power-supply bay must have either a
power supply or filler panel installed for proper cooling.
2. Install the power supply .1/ in the bay:
a. Place the handle .5/ on the power supply in the open position (that is,
perpendicular to the power supply) and slide the power supply into the
chassis.
b. Gently close the handle to seat the power supply in the bay.
3. Plug the power cord for the added power supply into the power cord connector
.2/.
4. Route the power cord through the cable-restraint bracket .3/.
5. Plug the power cord into a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6. Verify that the DC Power light .7/ and AC Power light .6/ on the power supply
are lit, indicating that the power supply is operating correctly.
7. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 84.
Removing a hot-swap power supply
Your server comes with two power supplies. You can add a third power supply.
Each power supply has two status indicators; see “Power supplies” on page 13 for
information about the status indicators.
Attention: If the NON REDUNDANT LED on the diagnostic LED panel is lit, do
not remove a hot-swap power supply without first turning the server off.
Refer to the illustration in “Installing a hot-swap power supply” on page 78 while
you perform the steps in this procedure.
8
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the
following label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts
inside these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these
parts, contact a service technician.
80
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Removing a hot-swap power supply
To remove a hot-swap power supply:
1. If the NON REDUNDANT LED on the diagnostic LED panel is lit, turn off the
server and peripheral devices (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43);
otherwise, go to the next step.
2. Remove the power supply .1/:
a. Unplug the power cord connector from the power supply.
Note: Be careful when you remove the hot-swap power supply; the power
supply might be too hot to handle comfortably.
12
CAUTION:
The following label indicates a hot surface nearby.
b. Remove the defective power supply by placing the handle .5/ on the power
supply in the open position (perpendicular to the power supply) and pulling
the power supply from the bay.
3. If you are not replacing the power supply:
a. Install a power-supply filler panel .2/.
Note: During normal operation, each power-supply bay must have either a
power supply or filler panel installed for proper cooling.
b. Open the cable-restraint bracket .3/ and remove the power cord from the
cable-restraint bracket. Close the cable-restraint bracket.
c. Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
If you are replacing the power supply:
a. Place the handle .5/ on the power supply in the open position, and slide
the power supply into the chassis.
b. Gently close the handle on the power supply to seat the power supply in
the bay.
c. Plug the power cord for the power supply into the power cord connector
.4/.
d. Verify that the AC Power light .6/ and DC Power light .7/ are lit, indicating
that the power supply is operating correctly.
4. If you have other options to install or remove, do so now; otherwise, go to
“Completing the installation” on page 84.
Chapter 4. Installing options
81
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly
Your server comes with three hot-swap fan assemblies.
Attention: Replace a fan that has failed within 48 hours to help ensure proper
cooling.
Note: You do not need to turn off the power to the server to replace a hot-swap
fan assembly.
The following illustrations show the replacement of a hot-swap fan assembly. Refer
to these illustrations while performing the steps in this procedure.
CPU
HDD
VRM
MEMORY
PCI BUS
NMI
A
B
POWER
1
SMI
SUPPLY
2
3
2
3
SERVICE
PROCESSO
BUS
R
NON REDU
NDANT
FAN
1
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
.6/
.7/
.8/
.9/
82
Hot-swap fan assembly 1
Fan assembly 1 LED
Fan 1 release latch
Hot-swap fan assembly 2
Fan assembly 2 LED
Fan 2 release latch
Fan Assembly 3 LED
Fan 3 release latch
Hot-swap fan assembly 3
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
TEMPERATU
RE
Replacing a hot-swap fan assembly
To replace a hot-swap fan assembly:
1. Remove the cover. See “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on
page 47 or “Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 48.
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not remove the top cover for
more than 30 minutes during this procedure.
2. Determine which fan assembly (fan 1 .1/, fan 2 .4/, or fan 3 .9/ to replace by
checking the fan LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel (see “Diagnostic LED
panel” on page 153) and the LEDs located on the fan assemblies.
3. Remove the fan assembly from the server by pressing the orange release latch
(.3/, .6/, or .8/) for the fan and pulling the fan away from the server.
4. Slide the replacement fan assembly into the server until it clicks into place.
5. Verify that the FAN LED on the diagnostic panel is not lit. If the FAN LED is lit,
reseat the fan.
6. Replace the cover. For a tower model, see “Completing the tower model
installation” on page 84. For a rack model, see “Completing the rack model
installation” on page 87.
Chapter 4. Installing options
83
Completing the installation
Completing the installation
To complete your installation, you must reinstall the cover reconnect all the cables
that you disconnected in “Preparing to install options” on page 43, and, for certain
options, run the Configuration/Setup Utility program. Follow the instructions in this
section.
Ÿ If you have a tower model, continue with “Completing the tower model
installation.”
Ÿ If you have a rack model, go to “Completing the rack model installation” on
page 87.
Completing the tower model installation
To complete the installation for the tower model:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install the left-side cover, if it was removed.
Install the trim bezel, if it was removed.
Install the server door, if it was removed.
Restart your server.
Update device records and reconfigure your server (see “Updating device
records and reconfiguring the server” on page 88).
To install the server left-side cover:
CP
U
VR
M
ME
MO
PC
RY
I BU
S
A
B
PO
WE
R
1
2
SU
PP
LY
3
FA
N
HD
D
NM
I
SM
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
NO
N
1
2
3
PR
OC
ES
SO
R
RE
DU
ND
AN
T
TE
MP
ER
AT
UR
E
.1/ Slots
.2/ Left-side cover
a. Align the left-side cover .2/ with the left side of the server, about 25 mm
(1 inch) from the front of the server; place the bottom of the left-side cover
on the bottom rail of the left-side side of the chassis.
b. Insert the tabs at the top of the cover into the slots .1/ at the top of the
server side.
84
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Completing the installation
c. Hold the cover against the server and slide the cover toward the front of
the server until the cover clicks into place.
To install the trim bezel:
CP
U
VR
M
MEM
PC
I BU
ORY
HD
S
D
A
B
PO
W
NM
SM
ER
SU
1
2
3
FA
PP
LY
NO
N
I
I
SE
BURVIC
S
E
N
RE
1
2
PR
OCE
DU
ND
AN
3
TE
MPE
RA
TU
SS
OR
T
RE
.1/ Trim bezel
.2/ Slots (hidden by bezel)
a. Place the tabs at the bottom edge of the trim bezel .1/ in the slots .2/ at
the bottom front of the server.
b. Press the top of the bezel toward the server until the bezel clicks into
place.
Chapter 4. Installing options
85
Completing the installation
To install the server door:
.1/ Flange
.2/ Server door
a. Set the door .2/ on the bottom hinge.
b. Press the flange .1/ downward while pressing the top of the door toward
the server, until the flange connects with the top hinge. Release the flange.
6. Close and lock the server door.
Attention: Be sure to maintain a clearance of at least 127 mm (5 inches) on
the front and rear of the server to allow for air circulation.
7. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the server, reconnect the
cables; then, plug the power cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Note: If necessary, see “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on
page 11 for connector locations.
86
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Completing the installation
Completing the rack model installation
To complete the installation for the rack model:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install the top cover, if it was removed.
Install the trim bezel, if it was removed.
Restart your server.
Update device records and reconfigure your server (see “Updating device
records and reconfiguring the server” on page 88).
To install the server top cover:
.1/ Top cover
.2/ Side latches
.3/ Flanges
a. Align the top cover .1/ with the top of the server, about 25 mm (1 inch) from
the front of the server; the flanges on the left and right sides of the cover
should be on the outside of the server chassis.
b. Hold the cover against the server and slide the cover toward the front of
the server until the cover clicks into place.
Chapter 4. Installing options
87
Completing the installation
To install the trim bezel:
.1/ Bezel-release lever
.2/ Trim bezel
.3/ Slots (hidden by bezel)
a. Place the tabs on the left side of the trim bezel in the slots .3/ at the left
front of the server.
b. Press the right end of the bezel toward the server until the bezel clicks into
place.
5. If you disconnected any cables from the back of the server, reconnect the
cables; then, plug the power cords into properly grounded electrical outlets.
Note: If necessary, see “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on
page 11 for connector locations.
Updating device records and reconfiguring the server
When you start your server for the first time after you add or remove an internal
option or an external SCSI device, you might see a message telling you that the
configuration has changed.
Some options have device drivers that you need to install. Refer to the
documentation that comes with your option for information about installing any
required device drivers.
If you have more than one microprocessor installed, you might want to upgrade
your operating system. Refer to “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information”
section of this Server Library. If you have installed or removed hard disk drives
and your server has a RAID adapter installed, refer to the documentation provided
with your RAID adapter for information about reconfiguring your disk arrays.
88
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Connecting external options
Run the Configuration/Setup Utility program to save the new configuration
information. See Chapter 3, “Configuring your server.”
Record your updated device and configuration information in the appropriate tables
in “Installed device records” on page 164.
Connecting external options
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Read the documentation that comes with your options.
Connecting external SCSI devices
You can attach a SCSI storage expansion enclosure to your server.
Cabling requirements
The SCSI controller in your server has one channel that can be used to attach
external devices. This channel is connected to the SCSI connector on the back of
the server and supports 14 unique SCSI IDs. To select and order the correct
cables for use with external devices, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing
representative.
For information about the maximum length of SCSI cable between the terminated
ends of the cable, see ANSI SCSI Standards:
Ÿ X3.131-1986 (SCSI)
Ÿ X3.131-1994 (SCSI-2)
Ÿ X3T10/1071D
Adhering to these standards ensures that your server operates properly.
Setting SCSI IDs for external devices
Each SCSI device that is connected to a SCSI controller must have a unique SCSI
ID, so that the SCSI controller can identify the devices and ensure that different
devices do not attempt to transfer data at the same time. SCSI devices that are
connected to different SCSI controllers can have duplicate SCSI IDs. The SCSI
controller uses one of the SCSI IDs; the default SCSI ID for the SCSI controller is
7. See “SCSI IDs” on page 68 and refer to the instructions that come with the
SCSI devices for more information about setting a SCSI ID.
Installation procedure
To attach an external device:
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Follow the instructions that come with the option to prepare it for installation
and to connect it to the server.
Chapter 4. Installing options
89
Connecting external options
Input/output ports and connectors
The input/output (I/O) connectors are for attaching external devices, such as
printers, keyboards, and displays, to your server. The I/O connectors on your
server include:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Two
One
One
One
One
One
One
One
Two
serial-port connectors
management port C connector
parallel-port connector
video-port connector
keyboard-port connector
auxiliary-device-port connector
SCSI connector
Ethernet-port connector
USB-port connectors
See the illustration in “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 11 for
the locations of the connectors.
90
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Connecting external options
Serial ports
Your server comes with two serial ports. (See “Input/output connectors and
expansion slots” on page 11 for the locations of the connectors.) These ports are
used to communicate with printers, plotters, external modems, scanners, and
auxiliary terminals. These ports also enable you to transfer data between
computers.
Serial ports can transfer data asynchronously, which means that they can transmit
any number of characters at any time, with no restriction on the duration of the
pauses between characters.
The serial ports can transmit and receive data and commands at rates of from 300
bits per second up to 115 000 bits per second.
Serial port A is shared by the operating system and the integrated Netfinity
Advanced System Management Processor. Serial port B can be used only by the
operating system.
Each serial port has a 9-pin, male D-shell connector on the back of the server. The
pin-number assignments of this connector conform to the industry standard.
5
1
6
9
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the serial-port
connectors.
Table 1. Serial port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
Data carrier detect
Receive data
Transmit data
Data terminal ready
Signal ground
6
7
8
9
Data set ready
Request to send
Clear to send
Ring indicator
When you turn on your server, the POST routine assigns the serial ports to specific
communication port addresses.
Some application programs use only certain ports, and some modems are designed
for use only at certain communication port addresses. You might need to use the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to change communication port address
assignments to resolve conflicts.
Management port C
Your server has a dedicated system-management I/O port. This port can be used
to attach a modem that is dedicated to communication with the Netfinity Advanced
System Management Processor.
The connector on the back of the server and the pin-number assignments are the
same as for the serial ports.
Chapter 4. Installing options
91
Connecting external options
Parallel port
The parallel port usually is used to communicate with printers, and transfers data
one byte at a time. The parallel port has a 25-pin, female D-shell connector on the
back of your server. It support three standard IEEE 1284 modes of operation:
Standard Parallel Port (SPP), Enhanced Parallel Port (EPP), and Extended
Capability Port (ECP). (See “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on
page 11 for the location of the connector.)
13
25
1
14
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the parallel-port
connector.
Table 2. Parallel port pin-number assignments
Pin
I/O
SPP/ECP Signal
EPP Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I
I
I
I
O
I
O
O
-
−STROBE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
−ACK
BUSY
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
−AUTO FD (feed)
−ERROR
−INIT
−SLCT IN
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
−WRITE
Data 0
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
Data 5
Data 6
Data 7
−ACK
−WAIT
PE (paper end)
SLCT (select)
−DSTRB
−ERROR
−INIT
−ASTRB
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
When you turn on your server, the POST routine assigns the parallel port a specific
port address. You can change the parallel-port assignment by using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. See “Devices and I/O Ports” on page 21.
92
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Connecting external options
Video port
The system board in your server has one SVGA video port. This port is used to
attach a video monitor. The video port has a 15-pin analog connector on the back
of the server. (See “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 11 for
the location of the connector.)
5
1
15
11
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the video connector.
Table 3. Video port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Red
Green or monochrome
Blue
Monitor ID bit 2
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
+5 V dc
Ground
Monitor ID bit 0
DDC SDA
Horizontal synchronization (Hsync)
Vertical synchronization (Vsync)
DDC SCL
Keyboard port
The system board has one keyboard port. (See “Input/output connectors and
expansion slots” on page 11 for the location of the connector.)
6
5
4
3
2
1
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the connector used by
the keyboard port.
Table 4. Keyboard port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
Keyboard data
Mouse data
Ground
+5 V dc
Keyboard clock
Mouse clock
Chapter 4. Installing options
93
Connecting external options
Auxiliary-device (pointing device) port
The system board has one auxiliary-device port that supports a mouse or other
pointing device. (See “Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 11 for
the location of the connector.)
6
5
4
3
2
1
The following table shows the pin-number assignments for the connector used by
the auxiliary-device port.
Table 5. Auxiliary-device port pin-number assignments
94
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
Data
Not connected
Ground
+5 V dc
Clock
Not connected
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Connecting external options
SCSI ports
Your server comes with a LVD SCSI controller on the system board, which
provides two independent SCSI channels. A 16-bit (wide) SCSI cable connects the
hot-swap backplane to one channel of the integrated LVD SCSI controller. Another
SCSI cable connects the other channel of the controller to the SCSI connector on
the rear of the server.
To attach an external SCSI device to your server, connect an external SCSI cable
from the SCSI device to the SCSI connector on the back of the server. Ensure that
the last device on the external SCSI cable is terminated.
34
1
68
35
Table 6 shows the pin-number assignments for the 68-pin SCSI connectors.
Table 6. 68-pin SCSI port connector pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
+Data 12
+Data 13
+Data 14
+Data 15
+Data P1
+Data 0
+Data 1
+Data 2
+Data 3
+Data 4
+Data 5
+Data 6
+Data 7
+Data P
Ground
DIFFSENS
Terminator power
Terminated power
Reserved
Ground
+Attention
Ground
+Busy
+Acknowledge
+Reset
+Message
+Select
+Control/Data
+Request
+Input/Output
+Data 8
+Data 9
+Data 10
+Data 11
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
−Data 12
−Data 13
−Data 14
−Data 15
−Data P1
−Data 0
−Data 1
−Data 2
−Data 3
−Data 4
−Data 5
−Data 6
−Data 7
−Data P
Ground
Ground
Terminator power
Terminated power
Reserved
Ground
−Attention
Ground
−Busy
−Acknowledge
−Reset
−Message
−Select
−Control/Data
−Request
−Input/Output
−Data 8
−Data 9
−Data 10
−Data 11
Chapter 4. Installing options
95
Connecting external options
Ethernet port
The system board in your Netfinity 5600 server contains an Ethernet controller.
The controller has an external RJ-45 connector on the rear of the server that is
used with a category 3, 4, or 5 unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cable. The connector
enables an Ethernet network to attach to the internal transceiver in your server.
Note: The 100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet standard requires that the cabling in the
network be Category 5 or higher.
See “Configuring the Ethernet controller” on page 34 for additional information
about the Ethernet controller.
Table 7 shows the pin-number assignments for the RJ-45 connector. These
assignments apply to both 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX devices.
10BASE-T or 100 BASE-TX
UTP Cable
1
2
RJ-45 Modular Plug Connector
3
Pins
6
Table 7. Ethernet port pin-number assignments
96
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
Transmit data+
Transmit data−
Receive data+
Reserved
5
6
7
8
Reserved
Receive data−
Reserved
Reserved
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Connecting external options
Universal serial bus ports
The system board in your Netfinity 5600 server contains two universal serial bus
(USB) ports. Each USB port has an external connector on the rear of the server
for attaching devices that previously used serial, parallel, keyboard, mouse, and
game ports.
USB is an emerging serial interface standard for telephony and multimedia devices.
USB technology uses Plug and Play technology to determine what device is
attached to the connector. Each USB device is accessed by a unique USB
address. A device called a hub is used to convert the USB port into multiple
attachment points. A hub has multiple ports where peripherals can be attached.
USB provides 12 megabits-per-second (Mbps) bandwidth with a maximum of 63
peripherals and a maximum signal distance of five meters (16 ft.) per segment.
Note: If more than one USB device is to be attached, then the device must be
connected to a hub.
Table 8 shows the pin-number assignments for the USB connectors.
Table 8. USB port pin-number assignments
Pin
Signal
1
2
3
4
VCC
−Data
+Data
Ground
Chapter 4. Installing options
97
Connecting external options
98
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Preparing for installation
Chapter 5. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
This chapter provides instructions for installing a server in a rack.
This chapter contains:
Installing the rack model in a rack enclosure . . . .
Preparing to install the server in a rack enclosure
Preparing the rack enclosure . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing the server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
99
99
100
103
Your server comes with all the rack installation hardware (rack model only).
Review the preinstallation information in “Preparing to install the server in a rack
enclosure”; then, continue with “Installing the rack model in a rack enclosure.”
10
CAUTION:
Do not place any object weighing more than 82 kg (180 lbs.) on top of
rack-mounted devices.
>82 kg (180 lbs)
Installing the rack model in a rack enclosure
During this procedure, you must install parts on the rack enclosure and the server.
This process can be divided in two parts:
Ÿ Preparing the rack enclosure
Ÿ Installing the server into the rack enclosure
Preparing to install the server in a rack enclosure
You will need the following items:
Ÿ One rack mounting kit
– Two slide-rail assemblies
– One cable-management arm, including hitch pins
– One bag of screws and nuts
– Hook and loop fastener strips
– One installation template
– One packet of tie wraps
– Two wheel-shaped knobs
Ÿ Flat-blade screwdriver
Ÿ The documentation that comes with the rack
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
99
Before you begin
Ÿ Before you begin to install your server in the rack, review the safety and
handling guidelines specified under “Safety information statements” on
page vii, and “Electrical safety” on page 41.
Ÿ To ensure rack stability, plan the installation of servers in the rack starting
from the bottom. If you are installing different server models in the rack
enclosure, install the heaviest models in the lower part of the rack
enclosure. For more information, refer to the IBM Netfinity Rack
Configurator program provided with the ServerGuide CDs. Refer to
“ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager Information” section of this Server
Library.
Ÿ Review the documentation that comes with your rack enclosure for safety or
cabling considerations. Ensure that your planned installation is within the
rack's guidelines for heat generation, electrical requirements, air flow, and
mechanical loading.
Ÿ Verify that the rack can meet the operating parameters, as detailed in
“Specifications” on page 170.
Ÿ Turn off the server, if it is on.
Preparing the rack enclosure
To attach the mounting hardware to the rack enclosure:
1. Mark the positions of the slide brackets and the cable management arm on the
mounting rails of the rack enclosure.
a. Position the template on the front mounting rail, aligning the holes.
b. Mark the holes for the slide bracket cage nuts, using the dots supplied with
the template. Also mark the holes for the chassis bracket cage nuts.
c. Move the template to the rear mounting rails. Mark the locations for the
slide bracket cage nuts and the cable-management-arm mounting bracket.
Note: You must align the slide brackets correctly or the installation cannot be
completed.
2. Install the cage nuts or clip nuts, as required for your rack enclosure, in the
marked positions.
100
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
3. Attach the slide rails to the rack.
a. Insert the left slide-rail rear bracket pin into the hole between the two cage
nuts for the slide rail at the rear of the rack. The two holes in the rear
bracket line up with the cage nuts.
b. Pull the slide-rail front bracket to the front of the rack; insert the front
bracket pin into the hole above the cage nuts for the slide rail. The two
holes in the front bracket line up with the cage nuts.
c. Do the same for the other slide rail.
.1/
.2/
.3/
Left slide rail
Left rear
Left front
d. From the outside of the rack enclosure, insert two M6 by 16-mm screws
through each slide-rail bracket and cage nut; then, tighten the screws.
4. Attach the cable-management arm to the left rear of the rack enclosure.
a. Align the cable-management-arm mounting bracket with the cage nuts on
the rear mounting rail.
Chapter 5. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
101
b. Insert two M6 by 16-mm screws to secure the mounting bracket to the rack.
.1/
.2/
.3/
.4/
.5/
Right rear
Left rear
Right front
Left front
Hitch pin
c. Attach the free end of the cable-management arm to the rear of the left
slide rail, using a hitch pin .5/.
102
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installing the server
To install the server in the rack enclosure:
1. Mount the server on the slide rails.
a. Extend the slide rails fully from the rack until the slide rails lock.
b. Rest the wheel-shaped knobs .1/ on the slide rails at a point close to the
rack.
c. Lower the front of the server until the bottom notch in each chassis bracket
fits into the top notch in the slide rail end.
Slide the server backward or forward as necessary until the notches meet.
Chapter 5. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
103
d. Attach the rails to the sides of the server with M4 by 5-mm screws.
2. Remove the wheel-shaped knobs from the server. Store the knobs in a safe
place to use if you need to remove the server from the rack at a later time.
3. Press the safety latches on the slide rails .1/ and slide the server about
halfway into the rack enclosure.
Note: When the server is fully extended, safety latches on the slide rails lock
into place. This prevents the server from being accidentally pulled out
too far and dropped. To release the safety latch, press in.
104
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
4. Attach the cables to the server.
a. Attach all cables to the corresponding connectors on the server. Refer to
the “Express Setup and Installation” section of this Server Library for
instructions.
b. Route the power cords, mouse cable, and keyboard cable through the
cable-restraint bracket.
c. Route all cables through the cable-management arm, attaching the cables
to the arm with the hook and loop fastener strips provided. The wraps are
provided for additional cable management.
5. Secure the server in the rack enclosure.
a. Slide the server into the rack enclosure until the slide latches on the front
chassis brackets click into place.
b. Using a screwdriver, tighten the screws that hold the rear of the slide rails
to the rear of the rack.
Chapter 5. Installing a server in a rack enclosure
105
c. Release the server and pull the server forward about half-way.
Note: To release the server, release the left and right slide latches and
pull the server forward.
d. Using a screwdriver, tighten the screws that hold the front of the slide rails
to the front of the rack.
e. Slide the server into the rack enclosure again until the slide latches on the
front chassis brackets click into place.
6. (Optional) For additional security, such as when transporting the rack, fasten
the server to the rack enclosure by inserting a M6 by 16-mm screw through the
chassis bracket, mounting rail, and cage nut on each side.
7. To complete the installation, refer to the documentation that comes with the
rack enclosure.
106
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Chapter 6. Solving problems
Server problems can be caused by hardware, software, or a user error. An
example of a user error is pressing the wrong key on the keyboard. You can check
server hardware by using the diagnostic programs and other information in this
chapter.
This chapter contains:
Diagnostic tools overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on self-test (POST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST beep codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System error log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option diskettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the test log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on self-test (POST) messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST message table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-on self test (POST) beep codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST beep code descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POST beep code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovering BIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic error message tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet controller messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI driver messages
NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) driver messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) driver messages . . . . . . . . . . .
UNIX messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller
. . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving configuration conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the software configuration setup
. . . . . . . . . .
Changing the hardware configuration setup . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying problems using status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic LED panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the system for damage
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After dropping it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
After spilling liquid on it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing the battery
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .
108
108
108
109
109
109
110
110
110
110
111
112
112
122
122
124
124
125
127
136
136
139
140
141
143
143
149
151
151
151
151
152
153
153
158
158
158
159
107
Diagnostic tools overview
Diagnostic tools overview
The following tools are available to help identify and resolve hardware-related
problems:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Diagnostic programs
Power-on self-test (POST)
POST beep codes
Error messages
Troubleshooting charts
Option diskettes
Diagnostic programs
The server diagnostic programs are stored in upgradable read-only memory (ROM)
on the system board. These programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of your server, such as the the system board, Ethernet controller,
video controller, RAM, keyboard, mouse (pointing device), diskette drive, serial port,
and parallel port. You can also use them to test some external devices.
Also, if you cannot determine whether a problem is caused by the hardware or by
the software, you can run the diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is
working properly.
Note: When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause
several error messages. When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the
first error message. After the cause of the first error message is corrected,
the other error messages might not occur the next time you run the test.
Power-on self-test (POST)
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
server components and some of the options installed in the server. This series of
tests is called the power-on self-test or POST.
POST does the following:
Ÿ Checks the operation of some basic system-board operations
Ÿ Checks the memory
Ÿ Compares the current server configuration with the stored server configuration
information
Ÿ Configures PCI adapters
Ÿ Starts the video operation
Ÿ Verifies that drives (such as the diskette, CD-ROM, and hard disk drives) are
connected properly
If you have a power-on password or administrator password set, you must type the
password and press Enter, when prompted, before POST will continue.
While the memory is being tested, the amount of available memory appears on the
screen. These numbers advance as the server progresses through POST and the
final number that appears on the screen represents the total amount of memory
available. If POST finishes without detecting any problems, a single beep sounds,
the first screen of your operating system or application program appears, and the
System POST Complete (OK) light is illuminated on the operator information panel.
108
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Diagnostic tools overview
If POST detects a problem, more than one beep sounds and an error message
appears on your screen.
Note: A single problem might cause several error messages. When this occurs,
work to correct the cause of the first error message. After the cause of the
first error message is corrected, the other error messages usually will not
occur the next time you run the test.
POST beep codes
POST generates beep codes to indicate successful completion or the detection of a
problem.
Ÿ One beep indicates the successful completion of POST.
Ÿ More than one beep indicates that POST detected a problem. For more
information, see “Power-on self test (POST) beep codes” on page 122.
Error messages
Error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to be used to
identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems indicated
by error messages should be performed by trained service personnel.
Hardware error messages that occur can be text, numeric, or both. Messages
generated by your software generally are text messages, but they also can be
numeric.
POST error messages
POST error messages occur during startup when POST finds a problem with the
hardware or detects a change in the hardware configuration. For more information,
see “Power-on self-test (POST) messages” on page 112.
Diagnostic error messages
Diagnostic error messages occur when a test finds a problem with the server
hardware. These error messages are alphanumeric and they are saved in the Test
Log. For more information, see “Diagnostic error message tables” on page 125.
Software-generated error messages
These messages occur if a problem or conflict is found by an application program,
the operating system, or both. Messages are generally text messages, but they
also can be numeric. For information about these error messages, refer to the
documentation that comes with your software.
Troubleshooting charts
The charts under “Troubleshooting charts” on page 143 list symptoms of problems
(for example, a symptom might be “The mouse or pointing device does not work.”),
along with steps to correct the problems.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
109
Diagnostic programs
System error log
The system error log contains all error and warning messages issued during POST
and all system status messages from the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor. See “System Event/Error Log” on page 28 for information about how to
view the system error log.
Option diskettes
An optional device or adapter might come with an Option Diskette. Option
Diskettes usually contain option-specific diagnostic test programs or configuration
files.
If your optional device or adapter comes with an Option Diskette, follow the
instructions that come with the option. Different instructions apply depending on
whether the Option Diskette is startable or not.
Diagnostic programs
This section includes useful information about running the diagnostic programs.
These programs are designed to test the IBM server. If you want to test a non-IBM
product, refer to the information that comes with that product.
Note: When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause
several error messages. When this occurs, work to correct the cause of the
first error message. After the cause of the first error message is corrected,
the other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run the
test.
Running diagnostic programs
While you are running the diagnostic programs, F1 displays Help information.
Pressing F1 from within a help screen provides a online documentation from which
you can select different categories. Pressing Esc exits Help and returns to where
you left off.
Important
If you run the diagnostic programs with either no mouse or a USB mouse
attached to your server, you will not be able to navigate between test categories
using the Next Cat and Prev Cat buttons. All other functions provided by
mouse-selectable buttons are also available using the function keys.
You can test the USB keyboard using the regular keyboard test. The regular
mouse test cannot test a USB mouse. Also, you can run the USB hub test only
if there are no USB devices attached.
Notes:
1. To run the diagnostic programs, you must start the server with the highest level
password that is set. That is, if an administrator password is set, you must
enter the administrator password, not the power-on password, to run the
diagnostic programs.
110
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Diagnostic programs
2. If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server
and try running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem persists, have
the system serviced.
3. If the diagnostic tests do not find a problem but the problem persists during
normal operations, see “Troubleshooting” on page 143 and look for the
problem symptom.
4. You might have to install a wrap connector on your active parallel, serial, or
Ethernet port to obtain accurate test results for these ports. If you do not have
a wrap connector, contact your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
5. You might need a scratch diskette (that is, a diskette which has no contents
that you want to save) to obtain accurate test results when testing the diskette
drive.
6. The keyboard and mouse (pointing device) tests assume that a keyboard and
mouse are attached to the server.
To start the diagnostic programs:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is turned on already, shut down your operating system and restart
the server.
2. When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is set, the server prompts
you for it. Type in the appropriate password; then, press Enter.
3. The Diagnostics Programs screen appears.
4. Select either Extended or Basic from the top of the screen.
5. Select the test you want to run from the list that appears; then, follow the
instructions on the screen.
When the tests have completed, you can view the Test Log by selecting Utility
from the top of the screen.
Also, you can view server configuration information (such as system
configuration, memory contents, interrupt request (IRQ) use, direct memory
access (DMA) use, device drivers, and so on) by selecting Hardware Info from
the top of the screen.
If the hardware checks out OK but the problem persists during normal server
operations, a software error might be the cause. If you suspect a software
problem, refer to the information that comes with the software package.
Viewing the test log
If you are already running the diagnostic programs, continue with step 4 on
page 112 in this procedure.
Notes:
1. The test log will not contain any information until after the diagnostic program
has run.
2. The test log is maintained in memory while the server is powered on. Turning
off the power clears the test log.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
111
POST messages
To view the Test Log:
1. Turn on the server and watch the screen.
If the server is turned on already, shut down your operating system and restart
the server.
2. When the message F2 for Diagnostics appears, press F2.
If a power-on password or administrator password is set, the server prompts
you for it. Type in the appropriate password; then, press Enter.
3. The Diagnostic Programs screen appears.
4. Select Utility from the top of the screen.
5. Select View Test Log from the list that appears; then, follow instructions on the
screen.
Power-on self-test (POST) messages
The following table shows error messages that can appear on the screen during the
power-on self-test (POST).
Notes:
1. The actions for some of the messages require you to run the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. For information about using these
programs, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
2. If a password prompt appears with a POST message, type the administrator or
power-on password; then, press Enter.
POST message table
POST message
062
Description
The server failed to boot on three consecutive attempts.
All caches are disabled. This can be caused by repeatedly turning the server on
and then off or resetting the server.
Action: Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and verify that all settings are
correct. (See Chapter 3, “Configuring your server.”) Use the Cache Control
selection in the Advanced Setup menu of the Configuration/Setup Utility program to
enable the caches. (See “Advanced Setup” on page 26.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced. When the problem is corrected,
make sure to enable the caches.
101
102
106
An error occurred during the system board and microprocessor test.
Action: Have the system serviced.
An error occurred during the system board and microprocessor test.
Action: Have the system serviced.
114
An adapter read-only memory (ROM) error occurred.
Action: Remove the options. If you can start the server without the options
installed, reinstall each option one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.
When an option fails, replace it.
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.
112
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
POST messages
POST message
129
Description
An error was detected in the L1 cache of one of the microprocessors.
Action:
1. If you just installed a microprocessor, verify that the microprocessor is installed
and seated correctly.
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a
microprocessor:
Ÿ If the System Error light on the operator information panel is on, check to
see if the CPU LED on the diagnostic LED panel is on. If it is on, check the
Microprocessor Error LEDs next to the microprocessor sockets on the
processor board (see “Processor board component locations” on page 175).
– If a Microprocessor LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the
microprocessor indicated by the LED. If the tests fail, replace the
indicated microprocessor.
– If the microprocessor tests do not fail, have the system serviced.
Ÿ If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program might provide additional information about the microprocessor
error.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
151
A real-time clock (RTC) error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
161
The real-time clock battery has failed.
Action: Have the system serviced or replace the battery yourself. For additional
information, see “Replacing the battery” on page 159 and “Lithium battery notice” on
page ix before you attempt to change the battery.
You can use the server until you replace the battery. However, you must run the
Configuration/Setup Utility program and set the time and date and other custom
settings each time you turn on the server.
162
A change in device configuration occurred. This error occurs under one or more of
the following conditions:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
A new device has been installed.
A device has been moved to a different location or cable connection.
A device has been removed or disconnected from a cable.
A device is failing and is no longer recognized by the server as being installed.
An external device is not turned on.
An invalid checksum is detected in the battery-backed memory.
Action: Verify that all external devices are turned on. You must turn on external
devices before turning on the server.
If you did not add, remove, or change the location of a device, a device is probably
failing. Running the diagnostic test programs might isolate the failing device, but
you must have the system serviced.
163
The time of day has not been set.
Action: Set the correct date and time. If the date and time are set correctly and
saved, but the 163 error message reappears, have the system serviced.
The server can be used until the system is serviced, but any application programs
that use the date and time will be affected.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
113
POST messages
POST message
164
Description
A change in the memory configuration occurred. This message might appear after
you add or remove memory.
Note: The server can be used with decreased memory capacity.
Action:
1. If POST error message 289 also occurred, follow the instructions for that error
message first.
2. If you have installed or removed memory, run the Configuration/Setup Utility
program; then, exit, saving the new configuration settings. For information
about using the Configuration/Setup Utility program see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
If the message appears again, shutdown the server, reseat the memory
modules, and restart the server.
3. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a
memory module:
Ÿ If the System Error light on the operator information panel is on, check to
see if the MEM LED on the diagnostic LED panel is on. If it is on, check
the DIMM Error LEDs next to the memory sockets on the processor board
(see “Processor board component locations” on page 175). If a DIMM Error
LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the memory.
– If the tests fail, replace the DIMM. If the problem persists after you
replace the DIMM, have the system serviced.
– If the memory tests do not fail, have the system serviced.
Ÿ If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program might provide additional information on the memory error.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
175
A vital product data (VPD) error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
176
177
178
184
A security hardware error occurred.
Action: Check for indications that someone has tampered with the server. If no
one has tampered with the server, have the system serviced.
The power-on password information stored in your server has been removed.
Action: From the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu, select System
Security. Then, follow the instructions on the screen. For information about using
the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu” on page 20.
If this information cannot be restored, have the system serviced.
185
A power failure damaged the stored information about the drive-startup sequence.
Action: From the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu, select Start
Options; then, follow the instructions on the screen. For information about using
the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu” on page 20.
If this information cannot be restored, have the system serviced.
186
A system board or hardware error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
187
The VPD serial number is not set.
Action: The system serial number is set in the VPD EEPROM at the time of
manufacturing. If the system board has been replaced, the system serial number
will be invalid and should be set. From the main menu of the Configuration/Setup
Utility program, select System Information, then select Product Data. If the
problem persists, have the system serviced.
188
A vital product data (VPD) error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
189
114
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
An attempt has been made to access the server with invalid passwords. After three
incorrect attempts, the server locks up; that is, the logon data fields are no longer
available to the user.
POST messages
POST message
201
Description
An error occurred during the memory controller test. This error can be caused by:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Incorrectly installed memory
A failing memory module
A processor-board problem
A system board problem
Action:
1. If you just installed memory, see “Installing memory-module kits” on page 64 to
verify that the new memory is correct for your server. Verify that the memory
modules are installed and seated correctly.
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a
memory module:
Ÿ If the System Error light on the operator information panel is on, check to
see if the MEM LED on the diagnostic LED panel is on. If it is on, check
the DIMM Error LEDs next to the memory sockets on the processor board
(see “Processor board component locations” on page 175). If a DIMM Error
LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the memory.
Ÿ If the tests fail, replace the DIMM. If the problem persists after you replace
the DIMM, have the system serviced.
Ÿ If the memory tests do not fail, have the system serviced.
3. If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility program
might provide additional information on the memory error.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
229
An error was detected in the L2 cache of one of the microprocessors.
Action:
1. If you just installed a microprocessor, verify that the microprocessor is installed
and seated correctly.
2. If the problem persists, check to see if the system has isolated the problem to a
microprocessor:
Ÿ If the System Error light on the operator information panel is on, check to
see if the CPU LED on the diagnostic LED panel is on. If it is on, check the
Microprocessor Error LEDs next to the microprocessor sockets on the
processor board (see “Processor board component locations” on page 175).
– If a Microprocessor LED is on, run the diagnostic program for the
microprocessor indicated by the LED. (If the Secondary Microprocessor
Error LED is on, run the “Alt CPU” diagnostic program.) If the tests fail,
replace the microprocessor.
– If the microprocessor tests do not fail, have the system serviced.
Ÿ If no error LED is on, the error logs in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program might provide additional information on the microprocessor error.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
289
An error occurred during POST memory tests and a failing DIMM was disabled.
Note: The server can be used with decreased memory.
Action:
1. If you just installed memory, see “Installing memory-module kits” on page 64 to
verify that the new memory is correct for your server. Verify that the memory
modules are installed and seated correctly. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program (see Chapter 3, “Configuring your server”). In the Advanced Setup
menu, select Memory Settings and enable the DIMM. (See “Advanced Setup”
on page 26.)
2. If the problem persists, replace the failing DIMM.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
115
POST messages
POST message
301
303
Description
An error occurred during the keyboard and keyboard controller test. These error
messages also might be accompanied by continuous beeping.
Action: Ensure that:
1. Nothing is resting on the keyboard and pressing a key.
2. No key is stuck.
3. The keyboard cable is connected correctly to the keyboard and to the correct
connector on the server.
Running the diagnostic tests can isolate the server component that failed, but you
must have your system serviced. If the error message remains, have the keyboard,
cable, and system serviced.
Note: If you have just connected a new mouse or other pointing device, turn off
the server and disconnect that device. Wait at least 5 seconds, and then,
turn on the server. If the error message goes away, replace the device.
602
Invalid diskette boot record
Action:
1. Replace the diskette.
2. If the problem persists, make sure that the diskette drive cables are correctly
and securely connected.
3. If the problem persists, replace the diskette drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
604
An error occurred during a diskette drive test.
Action:
1. Verify that the Configuration/Setup Utility program correctly reflects the type of
diskette drive that you have installed.
2. Run the diagnostic tests. If the diagnostic tests fail, have the system serviced.
662
A diskette drive configuration error occurred.
Action: If you removed a diskette drive, make sure that the diskette drive setting is
correct in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the setting is not correct,
change it. For information about using the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
962
A parallel port configuration error occurred.
Action: If you changed a hardware option, make sure that the parallel port setting
is correct in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the setting is not correct,
change it. For information about using the Configuration/Setup Utility program see
“Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
11xx
An error occurred during the system-board serial port test.
Action: If you have a modem, serial printer, or other serial device attached to your
server, verify that the serial cable is connected correctly. If it is, use the following
procedure:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Disconnect the serial cable from the serial port.
3. Wait five seconds; then, turn on the server.
If the POST error message does not reappear, either the serial cable or the device
is probably failing. See the documentation that comes with the serial device for
additional testing information.
If the POST error message reappears, have the system serviced.
116
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
POST messages
POST message
1162
Description
The serial port configuration conflicts with another device in the system.
Action:
1. Make sure the IRQ and I/O port assignments needed by the serial port are
available. (See Chapter 3, “Configuring your server.”)
2. If all interrupts are being used by adapters, you might need to remove an
adapter to make an interrupt available to the serial port, or force other adapters
to share an interrupt. For information about removing adapters, see “Working
with adapters” on page 52. For information about setting interrupts, see
Chapter 3, “Configuring your server.”
1301
Cable to Information LED panel not detected.
Action: Make sure that the cable to the operator information panel is connected.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1302
Cable to Power and Reset pushbuttons not detected.
Action: Make sure that the cable to the Power and Reset pushbuttons is
connected.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1303
I2C cable to Power Backplane not detected.
Action: Make sure that the cable to the power backplane is connected.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1304
Cable to Diagnostic LED panel not detected.
Action: Make sure that the cable to the diagnostic LED panel is connected.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1600
The Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor is not functioning.
Action:
1. If a jumper is installed on pins 7 and 8 of jumper block J20 of the system board,
remove it or move it to pins 8 and 9.
2. Disconnect the server from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds, reconnect
the server to the electrical sources, and restart the server.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1601
The Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor BIOS needs to be updated.
Action:
1. Disconnect the server from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds, reconnect
the server to the electrical sources, and restart the server.
2. If the problem persists, update the Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor BIOS. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section
of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
1800
A PCI adapter has requested a hardware interrupt that is not available.
Action:
1. Make sure that the PCI adapter and all other adapters are set correctly in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the interrupt resource settings are not
correct, change the settings. For information about using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “PCI Slot/Device Information” on
page 27.
2. If all interrupts are being used by other adapters, you might need to remove an
adapter to make an interrupt available to the PCI adapter, or force other
adapters to share an interrupt. For information about removing adapters, see
“Working with adapters” on page 52. For information about setting interrupts,
see “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
117
POST messages
POST message
1962
Description
No valid startup devices were found. The system cannot find the startup drive or
operating system.
Action: Be sure that the drive you want to start from is in the startup sequence.
1. Select Start Options from the Configuration/Setup Utility program main menu.
If you are unable to set the startup sequence, have the system serviced.
2. Check the list of startup devices in the Startup device data fields. Is the drive
you want to start from in the startup sequence?
Yes Exit from this screen; then select Exit Setup to exit the
Configuration/Setup menu. Go to step 3.
No
Follow the instructions on the screen to add the drive; then save the
changes and exit the Configuration/Setup menu. Restart the server.
3. Is an operating system installed?
Yes Turn off the server. Go to step 4.
No
Install the operating system in your server; follow your operating system
instructions to shut down and restart the server.
4. During server startup, watch for messages indicating a hardware problem.
If the same error message appears, have the system serviced.
2400
An error occurred during the testing of the video controller on the system board.
This error can be caused by a failing monitor, a failing system board, or a failing
video adapter (if one is installed).
Action: Verify that the monitor is connected correctly to the video connector. If the
monitor is connected correctly, have the system serviced.
2462
A video memory configuration error occurred.
Action: Make sure that the monitor cables are correctly and securely connected to
the server.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
5962
An IDE CD-ROM configuration error occurred.
Action: Check the signal and power cable connections to the CD-ROM drive. See
“System board component locations” on page 173 for the locations of the cable
connectors on the system board.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
8603
An error occurred during the mouse (pointing device) and mouse (pointing device)
controller test. This error can be caused by the addition or removal of a mouse, or
by a failing system board.
Note: This error also can occur if electrical power was lost for a very brief period
and then restored. In this case, turn off the server for at least 5 seconds,
and then, turn it back on.
Action: Ensure that the keyboard and mouse (pointing device) are attached to the
correct connectors. If they are connected correctly, use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Disconnect the mouse from the server.
3. Turn on the server.
If the POST error message does not reappear, the mouse is probably failing. See
the documentation that comes with the mouse for additional testing information. If
the problem remains, have the mouse (pointing device) serviced.
If the POST error message reappears, run the diagnostic tests to isolate the
problem. If the diagnostic tests do not find a problem and the POST error message
remains, have the system serviced.
00012000
Processor machine check.
Action:
1. Update the system BIOS. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information”
section of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
2. If the problem persists, replace the microprocessor.
118
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
POST messages
POST message
00019501
Description
Processor 1 is not functioning.
Action: Replace microprocessor 1. (The Microprocessor 1 Error LED on the
processor board will be on. See “Processor board component locations” on
page 175 for the location of the LED.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00019502
Processor 2 is not functioning.
Action: Replace microprocessor 2. (The Microprocessor 2 Error LED on the
processor board will be on. See “Processor board component locations” on
page 175 for the location of the LED.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00019701
Processor 1 failed the built-in self test.
Action: Replace microprocessor 1. (The Microprocessor 1 Error LED on the
processor board will be on. See “Processor board component locations” on
page 175 for the location of the LED.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00019702
Processor 2 failed the built-in self-test.
Action: Replace microprocessor 2. (The Microprocessor 2 Error LED on the
processor board will be on. See “Processor board component locations” on
page 175 for the location of the LED.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00180100
A PCI adapter has requested memory resources that are not available
Action:
1. Make sure that the PCI adapter and all other adapters are set correctly in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the memory resource settings are not
correct, change the settings. For information about using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu” on page 20.
2. If all memory resources are being used, you might need to remove an adapter
to make memory available to the PCI adapter. For information about removing
adapters, see “Working with adapters” on page 52. Disabling the adapter BIOS
on the adapter might correct the error. Refer to the documentation provided
with the adapter.
00180200
A PCI adapter has requested an I/O address that is not available, or the PCI
adapter might be defective.
Action:
1. Make sure that the I/O address for the PCI adapter and all other adapters are
set correctly in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. For information about
using the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
2. If the I/O port resource settings are correct, the PCI adapter might be defective.
Have the system serviced.
00180300
A PCI adapter has requested a memory address that is not available, or the PCI
adapter might be defective.
Action:
1. Make sure that the memory address for all other adapters are set correctly in
the Configuration/Setup Utility program. If the memory resource settings are not
correct, change the settings. For information about using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility
main menu” on page 20.
2. If the memory resource settings are correct, the PCI adapter might be defective.
Have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
119
POST messages
POST message
00180400
Description
A PCI adapter has requested a memory address that is not available.
Action: If all memory addresses are being used, you might need to remove an
adapter to make memory address space available to the PCI adapter. For
information about removing adapters, see “Working with adapters” on page 52.
Disabling the adapter BIOS on the adapter might correct the error. Refer to the
documentation provided with the adapter.
00180500
A PCI adapter ROM error occurred.
Action: Remove the PCI adapters. If you can start the server without the
adapters, reinstall each adapter one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.
When an adapter fails, replace it.
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.
00180600
A PCI-to-PCI bridge error occurred. More than one PCI bus tried to access memory
below 1 MB.
Action: Remove the PCI adapter that has the PCI bridge. If you can start the
server without the adapter, reinstall and retest the adapter. If the adapter fails,
replace it.
If you cannot isolate and correct the problem, have the system serviced.
00180700
xxxxyyyy Planar PCI device does not respond.
where xxxx is the PCI vendor ID and yyyy is the PCI device ID.
Action: Have the system serviced.
00180800
An unsupported PCI device is installed.
Action: Remove the PCI adapters. If you can start the server without the
adapters, reinstall each adapter one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.
When an adapter fails, replace it.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
00181000
PCI error.
Action: Remove the PCI adapters. If you can start the server without the
adapters, reinstall each adapter one at a time and retest after each is reinstalled.
When an adapter fails, replace it.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
01295085
The ECC checking hardware test failed.
Action: Have the system serviced.
01298001
No update data is available for processor 1.
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors
installed in the server. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section
of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
01298002
No update data is available for processor 2.
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors
installed in the server. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section
of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
01298101
The update data for processor 1 is incorrect.
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors
installed in the server. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section
of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
01298102
The update data for processor 2 is incorrect.
Action: Update the system BIOS to a level that supports the microprocessors
installed in the server. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section
of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
01298200
Microprocessor speed mismatch
Action: The microprocessors installed do not run at the same speed; install
microprocessors with identical speeds.
120
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
POST messages
POST message
I9990301
Description
A hard disk drive error occurred.
Action: Have the system serviced.
I9990305
POST could not find an operating system.
Action: Install an operating system. If you have already installed the operating
system, check the drive startup sequence (see “Start Options” on page 26). If the
drive sequence is correct, run the diagnostic tests to verify that the hard disk drive is
functioning correctly. If there is a problem with the hard disk drive (such as a bad
sector), you might have to reinstall the operating system.
If you cannot reinstall the operating system, have the system serviced.
I9990650
AC power has been restored.
Action: No action is required. This message appears each time AC power is
restored to the server after an AC power loss.
Other Numbers
POST found an error.
Action: Follow the instructions on the screen.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
121
POST beep codes
Power-on self test (POST) beep codes
The successful completion of POST is indicated by one beep and the appearance
of the first screen of your operating system or application program. More than one
beep indicates that POST detected an error.
Beep codes are sounded in a series of beeps. For example, a 1–2–4 beep code
sounds like one beep, a pause, two consecutive beeps, another pause, and four
more consecutive beeps.
POST beep code descriptions
The following list contains more detailed descriptions of the possible types of beeps
that your server might emit.
No beeps
If no beep occurs after your server successfully completes POST (that is,
after the System POST Complete (OK) light on the operator information
panel is illuminated), have the system serviced.
Continuous beep
This indicates that your startup (boot) microprocessor has failed, or your
system board or speaker subsystem might contain a failing component. If
the system continues through POST with no errors, have the system
serviced. If no video appears, the startup processor has failed; replace the
startup processor.
Note: If the server has only one microprocessor installed, that
microprocessor is installed in microprocessor connector U5 and is the
startup (boot) processor. If two microprocessors are installed, the
microprocessor installed in U6 is the startup processor and the
microprocessor installed in U5 is the application processor.
One short beep
If one beep occurs after your server successfully completes POST (that is,
after the System POST Complete (OK) light on the operator information
panel is illuminated), then POST has no configuration or functional errors to
report. One beep also occurs after your server completes POST if you enter
an incorrect power-on password.
Two short beeps
This beep combination indicates that POST encountered an error. The
Configuration/Setup Utility program will display additional information; follow
the instructions displayed. See “Power-on self-test (POST) messages” on
page 112 for explanations of any POST error messages.
Three short beeps
This beep combination indicates a system memory error. This combination
occurs only if the video BIOS cannot display the error message. Replace
the failing memory module.
122
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
POST beep codes
Repeating short beeps
This beep combination indicates that your server system board might contain
a failing component, your keyboard might be defective, or a key on the
keyboard might be stuck.
Ensure that:
1. Nothing is resting on the keyboard and pressing a key.
2. No key is stuck.
3. The keyboard cable is connected correctly to the keyboard and to the
correct connector on the server.
Running the diagnostic tests can isolate the server component that failed,
but you must have your system serviced. If the error message remains,
have the keyboard, cable, and system serviced.
Note: If you have just connected a new mouse or other pointing device,
turn off the server and disconnect that device. Wait at least 5
seconds, and then, turn on the server. If the error message goes
away, replace the device.
One long and one short beep
This beep combination indicates that POST encountered an error on a video
adapter. Have the system serviced if the integrated video adapter on the
system board is being used. If an optional video adapter is being used,
replace the failing video adapter.
One long and two short beeps
This beep combination indicates that a video I/O adapter ROM is not
readable, or the video subsystem is defective. If you hear this beep
combination twice, both the server system board and an optional video
adapter have failed the test. This beep combination might also indicate that
your server system board contains a failing component.
One long and three short beeps
This beep combination indicates that the system-board video subsystem has
not detected a monitor connection to the server. Ensure that the monitor is
connected to the server. If the problem persists, replace the monitor.
Two long and two short beeps
This beep combination indicates that POST does not support the optional
video adapter. This beep combination occurs when a video adapter is
installed that is incompatible with your server. Replace the optional video
adapter with one that is supported by the server or use the integrated video
controller on the system board.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
123
POST beep code table
Beep code
Description
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-2-1
1-2-2
1-2-3
1-4-3
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-3
2-2-4
2-3-2
2-3-3
2-3-4
2-4-1
3-1-1
3-1-2
3-1-3
3-1-4
3-2-1
3-2-2
3-2-3
3-2-4
Microprocessor register test has failed.
CMOS write/read test has failed.
BIOS ROM checksum has failed.
Programmable Interval Timer test has failed.
DMA initialization has failed.
DMA page register write/read test has failed.
Interrupt vector loading test has failed.
Secondary DMA register test has failed.
Primary DMA register test has failed.
Primary interrupt mask register test has failed.
Secondary interrupt mask register test has failed.
Interrupt vector loading has failed.
Keyboard controller test has failed.
CMOS power failure and checksum checks have failed.
CMOS configuration information validation has failed.
Screen memory test has failed.
Screen retrace tests have failed.
Search for video ROM has failed.
Screen test indicates the screen is operable.
Timer tick interrupt test has failed.
Interval timer channel 2 test has failed.
RAM test has failed above address hex 0FFFF.
Time-of-Day clock test has failed.
Serial port test has failed.
Parallel port test has failed.
Math Coprocessor test has failed.
Comparison of CMOS memory size against actual has failed.
Action: Have the system serviced.
1-2-4
1-3-1
1-3-2
3-3-1
3-3-3
RAM refresh verification has failed.
First 64 Kb RAM test has failed.
First 64 Kb RAM parity test has failed.
A memory size mismatch has occurred.
No memory has been detected in the system.
Action: Reseat the memory modules or install a memory module. If the problem
persists, have the system serviced.
2-3-1
3-3-2
Screen initialization has failed.
I2C bus has failed.
Action: Turn off the server and then restart the server. If the problem persists,
have the system serviced.
Recovering BIOS
If your BIOS has become corrupted, such as from a power failure during a flash
update, you can recover your BIOS using the recovery boot block and a BIOS flash
diskette.
Note: You can obtain a BIOS flash diskette from one of the following sources:
Ÿ Use the ServerGuide program to make a BIOS flash diskette.
Ÿ Download a BIOS flash diskette from the World Wide Web. Go to
http://www.pc.ibm.com/support/, select IBM Server Support, and make
the selections for your server.
Ÿ Contact your IBM service representative.
The flash memory of your server contains a protected area that cannot be
overwritten. The recovery boot block is a section of code in this protected area that
124
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
enables the server to start up and to read a flash diskette. The flash utility
recovers the system BIOS from the BIOS recovery files on the diskette.
To recover the BIOS:
Before you begin:
Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices” on
page 42.
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43); then remove
the cover (see “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 47 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 48).
2. Locate switch block 2 (SW2) on the system board (see “System board
component locations” on page 173).
3. Set switch 1 on switch block 2 to ON to enable BIOS recovery mode.
4. Insert the BIOS flash diskette into the diskette drive.
5. Restart the server.
The Recovery Boot screen will appear. A progress report, Loading data from
diskette xx%, is displayed. When programming is underway, a further
progress report, Programming block n of 7 yy%, is displayed. When recovery
is complete, Recovery complete, remove the diskette and return boot block
switch to the off position before rebooting..
6. Remove the flash diskette from the diskette drive.
7. Turn the server off.
8. Set switch 1 on switch block 2 (SW2) to Off to return to normal startup mode.
9. Restart the server. The system should start up normally.
Diagnostic error message tables
Error messages indicate that a problem exists; they are not intended to be used to
identify a failing part. Troubleshooting and servicing of complex problems indicated
by error messages should be performed by trained service personnel.
Sometimes the first error to occur causes additional errors. In this case, the server
displays more than one error message. Always follow the suggested action
instructions for the first error message that appears.
The following pages contain the error codes that you might receive in the diagnostic
program detailed test log and summary log when running the diagnostic programs
for your Netfinity 5600 server.
The format for the codes is:
fff-ttt-iii-date-cc-text message
where:
Chapter 6. Solving problems
125
fff
is the three-digit function code that indicates the function being tested
when the error occurred. For example, function code 089 is for the
microprocessor.
ttt
is the three-digit failure code that indicates the exact test failure that
was encountered. (These codes are for trained service personnel and
are described in the Hardware Maintenance Manual.)
iii
is the three-digit device ID. (These codes are for trained service
personnel and are described in the Hardware Maintenance Manual.)
date
is the date that the diagnostic test was run and the error recorded.
cc
is the check digit that is used to verify the validity of the information.
text message is a message that the diagnostic program generates that indicates
the reason for the problem. More information about the text message
follows.
Text messages
The text message format is:
Function Name:
Result (test specific string)
where:
Function Name is the name of the function being tested when the error occurred.
This corresponds to the function code (fff) given in the previous list.
Result
can be one of the following:
Passed
This result occurs when the diagnostic test completes
without any errors.
Failed
This result occurs when the diagnostic test discovers an
error.
User Aborted This result occurs when the user ends the diagnostic
test before it is complete.
Not Applicable This result occurs when the user specifies a
diagnostic test for a device that is not present.
Aborted
This result occurs when the test could not proceed
because of the system configuration.
Warning This result occurs when a possible problem is reported
during the diagnostic test, such as when a device that is to
be tested is not installed.
Test Specific String This is additional information that the user can use to analyze
the diagnostic problem.
126
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Diagnostic error messages
The following tables display the primary hardware failure messages that the
diagnostics might display.
Function: core system messages (001)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Processor board, ECC Test
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
System board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: video system messages (005)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Processor and system boards
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: serial port messages (011)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Built-in serial port on system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: parallel port messages (014)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Built-in parallel port on system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: USB port interface messages (015)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Can NOT test USB interface while it is in use
If you have a USB keyboard or mouse attached to your server, you cannot run the
diagnostic program for the USB interface.
Action: If you want to test the USB interface, turn the server off, disconnect the
USB keyboard and mouse, attach a regular keyboard and mouse, turn the server
on, and then run the diagnostic program for the USB interface.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
127
Result
Test specific string
Failed
System board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: PCI interface messages (020)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
System board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
Tab on PCI Hot Swap slot #n is bad.
where n is the number of the failing PCI slot.
Action: Make sure the tab and latch on hot-plug PCI slot n are closed correctly.
Note: For normal operation, the Power LED for the hot-plug PCI slot will be on and
the Attention LEDs will be off.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: SCSI interface messages (030)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
SCSI adapter in slot n failed register/counter/power test
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the adapter.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
SCSI controller on system board failed register/counter/power test
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: RAID messages (035)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: No ServeRAID adapter found on system board or PCI bus
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
Adapter in slot n; adapter/drive configuration error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action:
1. Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program.
2. If the problem persists, replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
128
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Result
Test specific string
Failed
Adapter in slot n; internal error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action:
1. Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program.
2. If the problem persists, replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Adapter in slot n; memory allocation error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
Adapter in slot n; PCI configuration error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action: Replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n. If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Failed
Adapter in slot n; POST error
where n is the slot number of the failing adapter.
Action: Replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n. If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Failed
Logical drive m on adapter in slot n
where m is the number of the failing logical drive and n is the slot number of the
adapter.
Action:
1. Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program.
2. If the problem persists, replace the ServeRAID adapter in slot n.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Logical drive on system board adapter
Action: Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program. If the problem persists,
have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; adapter/drive configuration error
Action: Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program. If the problem persists,
have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; internal error
Action: Run the ServeRAID Configuration Utility program. If the problem persists,
have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; memory allocation error
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; PCI configuration error
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board; POST error
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
SCSI drive in bay #n, SCSI ID m
where n is the bay number of the failing drive and m is the SCSI ID of the drive.
Action: Check the cable and power connections on the drive. If the problem
persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
SCSI drive on adapter in slot n, SCSI ID m
where n is the slot number of the adapter and m is the SCSI ID of the drive.
Action: Check the cable and power connections on the drive. If the problem
persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
129
Function: power supply messages (075)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Voltage sensed by the system is out of range
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: microprocessor error messages (089)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Invalid microprocessor in socket id xyz or BIOS setup problem
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Action:
1. Check the system error log for related error messages.
2. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section
of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
3. If the problem persists, replace the indicated microprocessor and run the
microprocessor diagnostic program again.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Microprocessor in socket id xyz
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Note: The Microprocessor Error LED associated with the microprocessor identified
will be on. See “Processor board component locations” on page 175 for the
location of the Microprocessor LEDs.
Action:
1. Reseat the microprocessor.
2. If the problem persists, replace the identified microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Processor in socket id xyz is defective
where xyz identifies the microprocessor that is causing the error message.
Action: Replace the microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Processor in socket id xyz is installed but not functioning
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Action:
1. Check the system error log for related error messages.
2. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section
of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
3. If the problem persists, replace the microprocessor indicated and run the
microprocessor diagnostic program again.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
130
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Result
Test specific string
Failed
Test setup error: Application microprocessor not installed or BIOS setup problem
Action:
1. Verify that the application microprocessor is installed and seated correctly.
2. Check the system error log for related error messages.
3. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section
of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
4. If the problem persists, replace the application microprocessor and run the
microprocessor diagnostic program again.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
VRM corresponding to Microprocessor in socket id xyz is defective
where xyz identifies the microprocessor whose VRM is causing the error message.
Action: Replace the VRM.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
VRM corresponding to Microprocessor in socket id xyz is not installed
where xyz identifies the microprocessor whose VRM is not installed.
Action: Install a VRM.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
messages (165)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor on system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: thermal system messages (175)
Function
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Fan #n
where n is the number of the failing fan.
Note: The Fann LED on the diagnostic LED panel will also be on.
Action: Replace the indicated fan.
Failed
Temperature sensed on processor board is out of range
Action: If one of the fan LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel is on, replace the
indicated fan.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
131
Function: status display messages (180)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Diagnostic LED panel
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
Operator information panel
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
LED on hot-swap SCSI backplane
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
LED on processor board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Failed
LED on system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: system memory messages (201)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
DIMM location Jn
where n is the number of the socket containing the failing DIMM.
Note: The DIMM Error LED for the failing DIMM will be on. See “Processor board
component locations” on page 175 for the locations of the LEDs and the
DIMM connectors.
Action:
1. Reseat the DIMM in DIMM socket Jn.
2. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Test setup error: Corrupt BIOS in ROM
Action: If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the
BIOS to the latest level. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information”
section of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Test setup error: Corrupt DMI BIOS, information in BIOS is not as expected
Action: If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the
BIOS to the latest level. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information”
section of this Server Library for information about obtaining updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
132
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Function: system cache messages (202)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: BIOS cannot access VPD information
Action: If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the
BIOS to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again. Refer to the “Getting
Help, Service, and Information” section of this Server Library for information about
obtaining updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: Corrupt DMI BIOS. Information in BIOS is not as expected
Action: If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the
BIOS to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again. Refer to the “Getting
Help, Service, and Information” section of this Server Library for information about
obtaining updates.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: No L2 cache detected on microprocessor socket id xyz or BIOS
setup problem
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Action:
1. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again. Refer to the “Getting
Help, Service, and Information” section of this Server Library for information
about obtaining updates.
2. If the problem persists, replace the identified microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: Unknown hardware problem associated with microprocessor in
socket id xyz
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Action:
1. If your server does not have the latest level of BIOS installed, update the BIOS
to the latest level and run the diagnostic program again. Refer to the “Getting
Help, Service, and Information” section of this Server Library for information
about obtaining updates.
2. If the problem persists, replace the identified microprocessor and run the
diagnostic program again.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Microprocessor in socket ID xyz
where xyz identifies the microprocessor causing the error message.
Note: The Microprocessor Error LED for the indicated microprocessor will be on.
See “Processor board component locations” on page 175 for the location of
the LEDs and the microprocessor connectors.
Action:
1. Reseat the identified microprocessor.
2. If the problem persists, replace the identified microprocessor.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Warning
Test setup error: Cache is disabled. Use system setup to enable before retrying the
test
Action: Use the Cache Control selection in the Advanced Setup menu of the
Configuration/Setup Utility program to enable the cache. (See “Advanced Setup” on
page 26.)
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
133
Function: diskette drive messages (206)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Internal diskette drive bay
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: CD-ROM messages (215)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: hard disk drive messages (217)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
BIOS drive #n
where n is the drive bay number.
Action: Have the system serviced.
Function: magnetic tape drive messages (264)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Aborted
Test setup error: No tape drives found
Action:
1. Check the cable and power connections to the drive.
2. If the problem persists, refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
The load/mount test failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
The Read/Write Self-diagnostic failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action:
1. Insert a new tape cartridge and run the diagnostic test again.
2. If the problem persists, refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
134
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Result
Test specific string
Failed
The Self-diagnostic failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
The unload/eject pushbutton test failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
This test is only applicable to SCSI tape drives that have a pushbutton. If the
problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
The unload/eject test failed for device n on adapter m
where n is the number of the device and m is the adapter number.
Action: Refer to the documentation provided with the tape drive.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: keyboard messages (301)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board keyboard test failed
Action:
1. Replace the keyboard.
2. If the problem persists, replace the keyboard cable.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: pointing device (mouse) messages (302)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
On system board pointing device test failed
Action: Replace the pointing device (mouse).
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Function: Ethernet messages (405)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
In PCI slot n
where n is the number of the PCI slot where the failing Ethernet adapter is installed.
Action: Replace the Ethernet adapter in slot n. If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Failed
On system board
Action: Have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
135
Ethernet controller messages
Function: analog/digital modem messages (415)
Result
Test specific string
Note: If you receive any diagnostic error messages that are not shown in this table, make sure that
your server has the latest levels of BIOS, Advanced System Management Processor, and diagnostics
microcode installed. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Not Applicable
No modem was detected
Action:
1. Make sure that the modem is present and attached to the server.
2. If the problem persists, replace the modem.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
Modem Reset Failed
Action: Replace the modem.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Failed
No dialtone detected
Action:
1. Make sure that the phone line is attached to the modem and that there is a dial
tone. (Connect a phone to the phone line and listen for a dial tone.) If there is
no dial tone, have the phone line serviced.
2. If the problem persists, replace the modem.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Not Applicable
PCI modem detected but not enabled
Action:
1. Change the configuration to enable the modem.
2. If the problem persists, replace the modem.
If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Ethernet controller messages
The integrated Ethernet controller might display messages from the following device
drivers:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare Server ODI
NDIS Adapter for level 2.01 (OS/2)
NDIS Adapter for level 4.0 (Windows NT)
SCO UNIX LLI
Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare server ODI driver messages
This section contains the error messages for the Novell NetWare or IntraNetWare
server ODI driver. The explanation and recommended action are included with
each message.
PCNTNW-NW-026 The MSM is unable to parse a required custom keyword.
Explanation: The user entered an incorrect parameter keyword.
Action: Reload the driver using the correct keyword.
PCNTNW-NW-054 The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.
Explanation: The adapter did not respond when the driver tried to initialize it.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
136
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Ethernet controller messages
PCNTNW-NW-058 The adapter did not respond to the initialization command.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting might not be valid or the EEPROM information might
be incorrect.
Action: Make sure the IRQ settings are correct in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. See “PCI
Slot/Device Information” on page 27 for information on setting the interrupt requests. If the IRQ
settings are correct, have the system serviced.
PCNTNW-NW-066 The cable might be disconnected from the adapter.
Explanation: The cable might be disconnected from the server Ethernet port.
Action: Verify that a cable is connected to the Ethernet port.
PCNTNW-NW-071 The matching virtual adapter could not be found.
Explanation: You tried to load another instance of the driver with a different I/O address. This new
adapter could not be found.
Action: Verify that you installed an IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter and make sure that the
adapter is seated correctly. If the adapter is seated correctly, have the system serviced.
PCNTNW-NW-072 A resource tag is unavailable.
Explanation: The driver tried to allocate some resources that were not available.
Action: Add or free some memory in the server. Then, restart the server.
PCNTNW-NW-073 Unable to allocate memory.
Explanation: The driver failed to allocate the memory needed for normal operation.
Action: Add more memory, or free some memory resources in the server. Then, restart the server.
PCNTNW-NW-074 The hardware interrupt cannot be set.
Explanation: An attempt was made to initialize a given hardware interrupt. The attempt was not
successful.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
If you have an Ethernet adapter installed, make sure the adapter does not share an IRQ with any other
device (see “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
PCNTNW-NW-075 The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) cannot be registered with the Link
Support Layer (LSL).
Explanation: An error occurred while the driver was trying to register with the LSL.
Action: Check the version of the NetWare or IntraNetWare Operating System. Make sure that this
driver is correct for the version of NetWare or IntraNetWare that you are using. Restart the server.
PCNTNW-NW-079 The Multiple Link Interface Driver (MLID) did not initialize MSMTx Free Count.
Explanation: The MSMTx Free Count is not initialized correctly.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
PCNTNW-NW-086 The driver parameter block is too small.
Explanation: The driver parameter block is too small.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
PCNTNW-NW-087 The media parameter block is too small.
Explanation: The driver media parameter block is too small.
Action: Restart the server. If the problem persists, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
137
Ethernet controller messages
PCNTNW-NW-091 The hardware configuration conflicts.
Explanation: You tried to load a new frame type for the existing controller. The hardware assumptions
made in doing so are incorrect. This error can also occur if you try to specify a mode (such as,
redundancy) that conflicts with another specified mode.
Action: Make sure that your hardware configuration matches the software settings. See “PCI
Slot/Device Information” on page 27 for information on viewing and changing interrupt requests.
PCNTNW-NW-126 The group bit in the node address override was cleared.
Explanation: The IEEE address has a group bit indicating that an address belongs to a group of
stations. This bit is used only as a destination address; it cannot be used as a source address. You
tried to enter a source address with this bit set. The driver cleared the group bit of the source address.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
PCNTNW-NW-127 The local bit in the node address override was set.
Explanation: The local bit in the IEEE address format indicates that the addresses are being managed
locally. If you use the node address override capabilities of this driver to enter a new address, the local
bit must be set. You entered an address without the local bit set. The driver has set the local bit.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
PCNTNW-NW-164 The device was not found.
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller in the server.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
PCNTNW-NW-165 The device was not found at IOADDRESS.
Explanation: The Ethernet controller cannot be found at the I/O address specified.
Action: The Ethernet controller does not require a parameter for the I/O address. Remove the I/O
address parameter.
PCNTNW-NW-167 PCI scan specified, device not found.
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic programs.
PCNTNW-NW-180 The DMA parameter is not necessary for PCI device.
Explanation: The Ethernet controller does not require a DMA setting.
Action: None necessary, message is for information only.
138
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Ethernet controller messages
NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) driver messages
This section contains the error messages for the NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) drivers. The
explanation and recommended action are included with each message.
PCNTND-1 Unable to open the Protocol Manager.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-6 Out of memory while allocating buffers.
Explanation: The driver could not allocate the requested buffers.
Action: Check your system configuration. Edit the PROTOCOL.INI file to reduce the number of
Txbuffers and Rxbuffers specified for the driver.
PCNTND-7 A Protocol Manager device error occurred.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-8 Bad status for the Protocol Manager.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-9 Cannot find the PROTOCOL.INI entry.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-10 The Protocol Manager Input Output Control (IOCTL) failed.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-11 Protocol Manager registration failed.
Explanation: The NDIS stack is not configured correctly.
Action: Check and correct your configuration.
PCNTND-15 Device not found.
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller in the server.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
PCNTND-16 PCI scan specified, device not found.
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
PCNTND-21 The adapter failed the checksum test.
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
139
Ethernet controller messages
PCNTND-23 WARNING: PCNET IRQ found = xx
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting (xx) in the PROTOCOL.INI file does not match the
hardware IRQ setting.
Action: Remove the IRQ setting from the PROTOCOL.INI file or change the IRQ setting in the
PROTOCOL.INI file to match the IRQ setting shown in the PCI Slot/Device Information selection of the
Advanced Setup menu in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on
page 27.)
PCNTND-24 WARNING: PCNET IRQ does not match PROTOCOL.INI.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file does not match the
hardware IRQ setting.
Action: Remove the IRQ setting from the PROTOCOL.INI file or change the IRQ setting in the
PROTOCOL.INI file to match the IRQ setting shown in the PCI Slot/Device Information selection of the
Advanced Setup menu in the Configuration/Setup Utility program. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on
page 27.)
PCNTND-25 PCI scan specified, PCI bus not found!
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the PCI bus.
Action: Run the diagnostic programs (see “Diagnostic programs” on page 110).
PCNTND-29 WARNING: DMA number is not necessary for PCI device.
Explanation: The Ethernet controller does not require a DMA setting.
Action: Remove the DMA setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
PCNTND-33 PCNET device with specified IOBASE is already in use.
Explanation: The specified I/O address number is already in use by another Ethernet controller or
device.
Action: Remove the I/O address setting in the PROTOCOL.INI file.
NDIS 4.0 (Windows NT) driver messages
This section contains the error messages for the NDIS 4.0 drivers. The explanation
and recommended action are included with each message.
PermaNet(tm) Server: No Secondary Adapter Found. Grouping Mode is disabled.
Explanation: The failover option requires an adapter that is compatible with the device driver of the
Ethernet controller on the system board. No such adapter was found.
Action: Make sure the correct adapter is installed.
.
PermaNet(tm) Server: Problem Occurs on the Primary Adapter. Switching over to the Secondary
Adapter.
Explanation: The system detected a problem with the primary Ethernet connection and has transferred
all network traffic to the secondary Ethernet controller.
Action: Identify the cause of the failure on the primary Ethernet connection. Restoring the operational
state of the primary connection will cause the network traffic to automatically transfer to the primary
Ethernet controller.
PermaNet(tm) Server: Switching back to Primary Adapter.
Explanation: The primary Ethernet connection is now operating correctly. Network traffic will
automatically transfer to the primary Ethernet controller.
Action: None needed, message is for information only.
140
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
.
Ethernet controller messages
UNIX messages
This section contains the error messages for the SCO UNIX LLI driver.
pnt0-2
PCI search specified, PCI device not found!
Explanation: The driver cannot locate the Ethernet controller on the PCI bus.
Action: Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
pnt0-6
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during an interrupt. Please check your
Streams parameters.
Explanation: On a SunSoft Solaris system, this message indicates that the system is out of Streams
memory blocks.
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks.
Modify the interrupt request (IRQ) settings in the Configuration/Setup Utility program, or run the
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.
pnt0-7
Cannot allocate memory for the adapter during reset. Please check your Streams
parameters.
Explanation: The system is out of Streams memory blocks.
Action: Use the CRASH utility to increase the number of Streams memory blocks.
pnt0-11
Device not found!
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
pnt0-12
Device failed checksum test!
Explanation: The driver cannot find an Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
pnt0-13
add_intr_handler failed! Interrupts already enabled.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.
pnt0-14
Cannot locate hardware.
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver cannot find any Ethernet controller.
Action: Verify that the Ethernet controller is enabled. (See “PCI Slot/Device Information” on page 27.)
If the Ethernet controller is enabled, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110 to run the diagnostic
programs.
pnt0-15
No more devices to open.
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver cannot find any more Ethernet controllers.
Action: Verify that additional IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters are present or replace the
Ethernet adapter that fails to respond. If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110
to run the diagnostic programs.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
141
Ethernet controller messages
pnt0-17
Device fault...Reset initiated!
Explanation: The SunSoft Solaris driver has been reset due to a device fault.
Action: Verify that additional IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapters are present or replace the
Ethernet adapter that fails to respond. If the problem persists, go to “Diagnostic programs” on page 110
to run the diagnostic programs.
pnt0-19
IRQ found for PCnet hardware does not match space.c (or pnt.conf)!
Explanation: This is a warning message referring to the interrupt request (IRQ) that the SunSoft
Solaris driver found in the system.
Action: Ignore this message if you are sure that this is what you want to do. Otherwise, run the
NETCONFIG program to match the hardware settings.
pnt0-20
add_intr_handler failed! Unknown interrupt type.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-21
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range interrupt number.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-22
add_intr_handler failed! Out of range IPL.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-23
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already occupied.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-24
add_intr_handler failed! Vector already shared at different IPL.
Explanation: The interrupt request (IRQ) that was specified, or the IRQ that was found, conflicts with
other devices in the server.
Action: Modify your hardware settings.
Run the NETCONFIG program to search for another Ethernet controller.
pnt0-26
The DMA number is not necessary for PCI device.
Explanation: The IBM Netfinity 10/100 Fault Tolerant Adapter does not require a DMA setting.
Action: Edit the SPACE.C file to delete the DMA parameter.
pnt0-29
The IRQ number is already in use.
Explanation: The specified I/O address is already in use.
Action: Run the NETCONFIG program to modify your hardware settings.
142
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Troubleshooting
pnt0-31
I/O address is not necessary for the PCI device.
Explanation: The I/O address specified is not required.
Action: Remove the assigned I/O address specified for the Ethernet controller.
Troubleshooting
You can use the troubleshooting charts in this section to find solutions to problems
that have definite symptoms.
Note: Review “Electrical safety” on page 41 before you start troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting charts
Look for the symptom in the left column of the chart. Instructions and probable
solutions to the problem are in the right column. If you have just added new
software or a new option and your server is not working, do the following before
using the troubleshooting charts:
Ÿ Remove the software or device that you just added.
Ÿ Run the diagnostic tests to determine if your server is running correctly.
Ÿ Reinstall the new software or new device.
CD-ROM drive
problems
The CD is not working
properly.
Action
Clean the CD by wiping it with a soft, lint-free cloth, from the center of the
CD to the outer edge. Do not clean in a circular pattern. This can cause
loss of data.
If a problem still exists, have the system serviced.
The CD-ROM drive tray
is not working.
The server must be turned on. If the server is on and the tray does not
eject, insert the end of a paper clip into the manual tray-release opening.
If the drive still does not work correctly, have the system serviced.
The CD-ROM drive is not
recognized.
Verify that:
Diskette drive problems
Action
The diskette drive in-use
light stays on, or the
system bypasses the
diskette drive.
If there is a diskette in the drive, verify that:
1. The primary IDE channel is enabled in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
2. All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
3. The correct device driver is installed for the CD-ROM drive.
1. The diskette drive is enabled in the Configuration/Setup Utility
program.
2. The diskette is good and not damaged. (Try another diskette if you
have one.)
3. The diskette is inserted correctly in the drive.
4. The diskette contains the necessary files to start the server.
5. Your software program is OK. See “Software Problem” on page 148.
If the diskette drive in-use light stays on, or the system continues to
bypass the diskette drive, have the system serviced.
Monitor self-tests
Action
Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem
with your monitor, refer to the information that comes with the monitor for
adjusting and testing instructions.
If you still cannot find the problem, have the monitor and system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
143
Troubleshooting
Monitor problems
Action
The screen is blank.
Verify that:
1. The server power cord is plugged into the server and a working
electrical outlet.
2. The monitor power cord is plugged into the monitor and a working
electrical outlet.
3. The monitor is turned on and the Brightness and Contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
4. The monitor signal cable is connected to the correct connector on the
server.
If the items above are correct and the screen remains blank, have the
system serviced.
Only the cursor appears.
Have the system serviced.
The monitor works when
you turn on the server,
but goes blank when you
start some application
programs.
Verify that the primary monitor cable is connected to the video port.
The screen flickers.
Set the monitor for the highest, noninterlaced refresh rate available.
To find the video port, see “Input/output connectors and expansion slots”
on page 11.
Be sure that you installed the necessary device drivers for the
applications.
To reset the refresh rate, use a utility program, such as AnyView
Professional or WinMode.
Wavy, unreadable,
rolling, distorted screen,
or screen jitter.
If the monitor self-tests show the monitor is OK, consider the location of
the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as transformers,
appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause screen jitter
or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this happens,
turn off the monitor. (Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might
cause screen discoloration.) Then move the device and the monitor at
least 305 mm (12 in.) apart. Turn on the monitor.
Note:
1. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors. be sure the
distance between monitors and diskette drives is at least 76
mm (3 in.).
2. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
3. An enhanced monitor cable with additional shielding is
available for the 9521 and 9527 monitors. For information
about the enhanced monitor cable, see your IBM reseller or
IBM marketing representative.
If the problem still exists, have the monitor and system serviced.
Wrong characters appear
on the screen.
If the wrong language is displayed, update the BIOS with the correct
language. Refer to the “Getting Help, Service, and Information” section of
this Server Library for information about obtaining updates for the BIOS.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
144
General problems
Action
Problems such as broken
cover locks or indicator
lights not working.
Have the system serviced.
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Troubleshooting
Power problems
Action
The server does not
power on.
Verify that:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The power cables are properly connected to the server.
The power outlet functions properly.
The type of memory installed is correct.
If you just installed an option, remove it, and restart the server. If the
server now powers on, you might have installed more options than the
power supply supports.
5. The LEDs on the power supply are on. See “Power supply LEDs” on
page 152 for more information about the power supply LEDs.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Intermittent problems
Action
A problem occurs only
occasionally and is
difficult to detect.
Verify that:
1. All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server
and attached options.
2. When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the rear of the server
at the fan grill. If there is no air flow, the fan is not working. This
causes the server to overheat and shut down.
3. Ensure that the SCSI bus and devices are configured correctly and
that the last external device in each SCSI chain is terminated
correctly. See “SCSI drives” on page 68.
If the items above are correct, have the system serviced.
Microprocessor
problems
Action
The server emits a
continuous tone during
POST.
The startup (boot) microprocessor is not working properly. If your server
contains two microprocessors, the microprocessor in the highest
numbered microprocessor socket is the startup microprocessor.
1. Verify that the startup microprocessor is seated properly.
2. If your server contains two microprocessors, remove the startup
microprocessor, install a terminator card, and restart the server. If the
server starts properly, replace the old startup microprocessor.
3. Replace the startup microprocessor. Restart the server.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Keyboard, mouse,
or pointingdevice problems
All or some keys on the
keyboard do not work.
Action
1. Make sure that the keyboard cable is properly connected to the
server.
2. Make sure that the server and the monitor are turned on.
3. Try using another keyboard.
If the items above are correct, have the system serviced.
The mouse or pointing
device does not work.
1. Verify that the mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected
and the device drivers are installed correctly.
2. Try using another mouse or pointing device.
If the problem still exists, have the server and the device serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
145
Troubleshooting
Memory problems
Action
The amount of memory
displayed is less than the
amount of memory
installed.
Verify that:
1. The memory modules are seated properly.
2. You have installed the correct type of memory (see “Installing
memory-module kits” on page 64).
3. If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration
with the Configuration/Setup Utility program. For information about
using the Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
4. All banks of memory on the DIMMs are enabled (see “Memory
Settings” on page 28). The server might have automatically disabled
a DIMM bank when it detected a problem or a DIMM bank could have
been manually disabled.
If the above items are correct, run the memory diagnostic program. The
system might have detected a bad memory module and automatically
reallocated memory to enable you to continue to operate. If the memory
tests fail, have the system serviced or replace the failing DIMM.
Option problems
Action
An IBM option that used
to work does not work
now.
Verify that all of the option hardware and cable connections are secure.
If the option comes with its own test instructions, use those instructions to
test the option.
If the failing option is a SCSI option, verify that:
1. The cables for all external SCSI options are connected correctly.
2. The last option in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
3. Any external SCSI option is turned on. You must turn on an external
SCSI option before turning on the server.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
An IBM option that was
just installed does not
work.
Verify that:
1. The option is designed for the server. Refer to the “Getting Help,
Service, and Information” section of this Server Library for information
about obtaining ServerProven compatibility information from the
World Wide Web.
2. You followed the installation instructions that come with the option.
3. The option is installed correctly.
4. You have not loosened any other installed options or cables.
5. You updated the configuration information in the Configuration/Setup
Utility program. Whenever memory or an option is changed, you must
update the configuration. For information about using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program, see “Using the
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Parallel port problems
Action
The number of parallel
ports displayed is less
than the number of
parallel ports installed.
Verify that:
1. Each port is assigned a unique address.
2. The parallel-port adapter, if you installed one, is seated properly.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
146
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Troubleshooting
Serial port problems
Action
The number of serial
ports identified by the
operating system is less
than the number of serial
ports installed.
Verify that:
1. Each port is assigned a unique address by the Configuration/Setup
Utility program and none of the serial ports are disabled.
Note: The management C connector is the same as a serial port
connector, but it is used only by the integrated Netfinity
Advanced System Management Processor, and is not
available for use by the operating system. This port does not
appear in the Configuration/Setup Utility program menus; it
can be configured using Netfinity Manager.
2. The serial-port adapter, if you installed one, is seated properly.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
A serial device does not
work.
Verify that:
1. The device is compatible with the server. Refer to the “Getting Help,
Service, and Information” section of this Server Library for information
about obtaining ServerProven compatibility information from the World
Wide Web.
2. The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
3. Make sure that the device is not connected to the management port
C.
Note: The management C connector is the same as a serial port
connector, but it is used only by the integrated Netfinity
Advanced System Management Processor and is not available
for use by the operating system. This port does not appear in
the Configuration/Setup Utility program menus; it can be
configured using Netfinity Manager.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Universal Serial Bus
(USB) port problems
A USB device does not
work.
Action
Verify that:
1. You are not trying to use a USB device during POST if you have a
standard (non-USB) keyboard attached to the keyboard port.
Note: If a standard (non-USB) keyboard is attached to the keyboard
port, then the USB is disabled and no USB device will work
during POST.
2. The correct USB device driver is installed.
3. Your operating system supports USB devices.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Printer problems
Action
The printer does not
work.
Verify that:
1. The printer is turned on and is online.
2. The printer signal cable is connected to the correct serial or parallel
port on the server. For the location of the serial or parallel port, see
“Input/output connectors and expansion slots” on page 11.
Note: Non-IBM printer cables might cause unpredictable problems.
3. You have assigned the printer port correctly in your operating system
or application program.
4. You have assigned the printer port correctly using the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
If the items above are correct and the printer still does not work, run the
tests described in the documentation that comes with your printer. If the
tests show that the printer is OK, have the system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
147
Troubleshooting
Expansion enclosure
problems
The SCSI expansion
enclosure used to work,
but does not work now.
Action
Verify that all of the SCSI expansion enclosure hardware and cable
connections are secure.
Verify that:
1. The cables for all external SCSI options are connected correctly.
2. The last option in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
3. Any external SCSI option is turned on. You must turn on an external
SCSI option before turning on the server.
For more information, see your SCSI and expansion enclosure
documentation.
If the SCSI expansion enclosure comes with its own test instructions, use
those instructions to test it. In addition, test the power supply.
If the items above are correct and the test programs found no problem,
have the server and SCSI expansion enclosure serviced.
Software problems
Action
Suspected software
problem.
To determine if problems are caused by the software, verify that:
1. Your server has the minimum memory requirements needed to use
the software. For memory requirements, refer to the information that
comes with the software.
Note: If you have just installed an adapter or memory, you might
have a memory address conflict.
2. The software is designed to operate on your server.
3. Other software works on your server.
4. The software that you are using works on another system.
If you received any error messages when using the software program,
refer to the information that comes with the software for a description of
the messages and solutions to the problem.
If the items above are correct and the problem remains, contact your
place of purchase.
Netfinity Service
Processor Manager
problems
Netfinity Service
Processor Manager
reports a general monitor
failure
Action
Disconnect the server from all electrical sources, wait for 30 seconds,
reconnect the server to the electrical sources, and restart the server.
If a problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Note: If you cannot find the problem in the troubleshooting charts, go to “Running
diagnostic programs” on page 110 to test the server. If you have run the
diagnostic test programs or if running the tests does not reveal the problem,
have the system serviced.
148
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting the Ethernet controller
This section provides troubleshooting information for problems that might occur with
the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet controller.
Network connection problems
If the Ethernet controller cannot connect to the network, check the following:
Ÿ Make sure that the cable is installed correctly.
The network cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem persists, try a different cable.
If you set the Ethernet controller to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use
Category 5 cabling.
If you directly connect two workstations (without a hub), or if you are not using
a hub with X ports, use a crossover cable.
Note: To determine whether a hub has an X port, check the port label. If the
label contains an X, the hub has an X port.
Ÿ Determine if the hub supports auto-negotiation. If not, try configuring the
integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and duplex mode of
the hub.
Ÿ Check the Ethernet controller lights on the operator information panel.
These lights indicate whether a problem exists with the connector, cable, or
hub.
– The Ethernet Link Status light illuminates when the Ethernet controller
receives a LINK pulse from the hub. If the light is off, there might be a bad
connector or cable, or a problem with the hub.
– The Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light illuminates when the Ethernet
controller sends or receives data over the Ethernet Network. If the
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light is off, make sure that the hub and
network are operating and that the correct device drivers are loaded.
– The Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps light illuminates when the Ethernet
controller LAN speed is 100 Mbps.
Ÿ Make sure that you are using the correct device drivers, supplied with your
server.
Ÿ Check for operating system-specific causes for the problem.
Ÿ Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.
Ÿ Test the Ethernet controller.
How you test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating system you
are using (see the Ethernet controller device driver README file).
Chapter 6. Solving problems
149
Troubleshooting
Ethernet controller troubleshooting chart
You can use the following troubleshooting chart to find solutions to 10/100 Mbps
Ethernet controller problems that have definite symptoms.
Controller problem
Action
The server stops running
when loading device drivers.
The PCI BIOS interrupt settings are incorrect.
Check the following:
Ÿ Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet
controller is also assigned to another device in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some
devices do not function well when they share an interrupt with a
dissimilar PCI device. Try changing the IRQ assigned to the
Ethernet controller or the other device. (See “Resolving
configuration conflicts” on page 151.) For example, for NetWare
Versions 3 and 4 it is recommended that disk controllers not share
interrupts with LAN controllers.
Ÿ Make sure that you are using the most recent device driver
available from the World Wide Web. (Refer to the “Getting Help,
Service, and Information” section of this Server Library for World
Wide Web addresses.)
Ÿ Run the network diagnostic program.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Ethernet Link Status light
does not light.
Check the following:
Ÿ Make sure that the hub is turned on.
Ÿ Check all connections at the Ethernet controller and the hub.
Ÿ Check the cable. A crossover cable is required unless the hub
has an X designation.
Ÿ Use another port on the hub.
Ÿ If the hub does not support auto-negotiation, manually configure
the Ethernet controller to match the hub.
Ÿ If you manually configured the duplex mode, make sure that you
also manually configure the speed.
Ÿ Run diagnostics for the LEDs.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
The Ethernet
Transmit/Receive Activity
light does not light.
Check the following:
Note: The Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity LED illuminates only
when data is sent to or by this Ethernet controller.
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Data is incorrect or sporadic.
Make sure that you have loaded the network device drivers.
The network might be idle. Try sending data from this workstation.
Run diagnostics on the LEDs.
The function of this LED can be changed by device driver load
parameters. If necessary, remove any LED parameter settings
when you load the device drivers.
Check the following:
Ÿ Make sure that you are using Category 5 cabling when operating
the server at 100 Mbps.
Ÿ Make sure that the cables do not run close to noise-inducing
sources like fluorescent lights.
150
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Controller problem
Action
The Ethernet controller
stopped working when
another adapter was added
to the server.
Check the following:
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Ÿ
Make sure that the cable is connected to the Ethernet controller.
Make sure that your PCI system BIOS is current.
Reseat the adapter (see “Working with adapters” on page 52).
Determine if the interrupt (IRQ) setting assigned to the Ethernet
adapter is also assigned to another device in the
Configuration/Setup Utility program.
Although interrupt sharing is allowed for PCI devices, some
devices do not function well when they share an interrupt with a
dissimilar PCI device. Try changing the IRQ assigned to the
Ethernet adapter or the other device. (See “Resolving
configuration conflicts” on page 151.)
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
The Ethernet controller
stopped working without
apparent cause.
Check the following:
Ÿ Run diagnostics for the Ethernet controller.
Ÿ Try a different connector on the hub.
Ÿ Reinstall the device drivers. Refer to your operating-system
documentation and to the “ServerGuide and Netfinity Manager
Information” section of this Server Library.
If the problem still exists, have the system serviced.
Resolving configuration conflicts
The Configuration/Setup Utility program configures only the server hardware. It
does not consider the requirements of the operating system or the application
programs. For these reasons, memory-address configuration conflicts might occur.
Changing the software configuration setup
The best way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the software
configuration by changing the addresses that the EMS device driver defined. The
SVGA video memory occupies 32 KB (1 KB = approximately 1000 bytes) of space
in the hex C0000 to C7FFF EMS memory area. EMS device drivers must use
addresses different from those assigned to video read-only memory (ROM). You
can use the Configuration/Setup Utility program to view or change the current
setting for video ROM. For information about using the Configuration/Setup Utility
program, see “Using the Configuration/Setup Utility main menu” on page 20.
Changing the hardware configuration setup
An alternative way to resolve memory-address conflicts is to change the address of
the conflicting hardware option.
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Your server has LEDs to help you identify problems with some server components.
These LEDs are part of the light path diagnostics built into the server. By following
the path of lights, you can quickly identify the type of system error that occurred.
See “Light path diagnostics” on page 153 for more information.
Status LEDs are located on the following components:
Ÿ Operator information panel
For more information, see “Operator information panel” on page 10.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
151
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Ÿ Hard disk drive trays
For more information, see “Controls and indicators” on page 7.
Ÿ Power supply
For more information, see “Power supply LEDs.”
Ÿ Diagnostic LED panel
For more information, see “Diagnostic LED panel” on page 153.
Ÿ System board
See “System board component locations” on page 173 for locations of the
LEDs on the system board.
Ÿ Processor board
See “Processor board component locations” on page 175 for locations of the
LEDs on the processor board.
Power supply LEDs
The AC and DC Power LEDs on the power supply provide status information about
the power supply. See “Power supplies” on page 13 for the location of these
LEDs.
The following table describes the AC and DC Power LEDs.
AC Power LED
DC Power LED
Description and action
On
On
The power supply is on and operating correctly.
On
Off
There is a DC power problem.
Possible causes:
1. The Power Control button on the front of
the server is in the Off position.
Action: Press the Power Control button to
start the server.
2. The power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the power supply.
If the problem persists, have the system
serviced.
Off
Off
There is an AC power problem.
Possible causes:
1. There is no AC power to the power supply.
Actions: Verify that:
Ÿ The power cord is properly connected
to the server.
Ÿ The power outlet functions properly.
2. The power supply has failed.
Action: Replace the power supply.
If the problem persists, have the system
serviced.
152
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Diagnostic LED panel
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the diagnostic LED panel inside the
server. See “Light path diagnostics” for information on identifying problems using
these LEDs.
HDD
CPU
VRM
MEMORY
NMI
PCI BUS
SMI
A
B
SERVICE PROCESSOR
BUS
POWER SUPPLY
NON REDUNDANT
1
2
3
FAN
TEMPERATURE
1
2
3
Light path diagnostics
You can use the light path diagnostics built into your server to quickly identify the
type of system error that occurred. Your server is designed so that any LEDs that
are illuminated remain illuminated when the server shuts down as long as the AC
power source is good and the power supplies can supply +5V dc current to the
server. This feature helps you isolate the problem if an error causes the server to
shut down. See Table 9 on page 154.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
153
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Table 9 (Page 1 of 4). Light path diagnostics
System Error
LED (operator
information
panel)
Lit LED on
diagnostic LED
panel
Cause
Action
On
None
The system error log is 75% or more
full or a PFA alert was logged.
Check the system error log and correct
any problems. See “POST Error Log”
on page 28 for information about
clearing the error log. Disconnecting
the server from all power sources for at
least 20 seconds will turn off the
System Error LED.
CPU
One of the microprocessors has failed
or a microprocessor is installed in the
wrong connector.
1. Check the Microprocessor Error
LEDs on the processor board.
2. Turn off the server, reseat the
microprocessor indicated by the lit
Microprocessor Error LED, and
restart the server.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
microprocessor.
A system error
was detected.
Check to see
which of the
LEDs on the
diagnostic LED
panel inside the
server are on.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
VRM
One of the voltage regulator modules
on the processor board has failed.
1. Check the VRM Error LEDs on the
processor board.
2. Turn off the server, reseat the VRM
indicated by the lit VRM Error LED,
and restart the server.
3. If the problem persists, replace the
VRM.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
MEMORY
154
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
A memory error occurred.
1. Check the DIMM Error LEDs on the
processor board.
2. Replace the DIMM indicated by the
lit DIMM Error LED.
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Table 9 (Page 2 of 4). Light path diagnostics
System Error
LED (operator
information
panel)
Lit LED on
diagnostic LED
panel
Cause
On (continued)
PCI BUS A
An error occurred on PCI bus A. An
adapter in PCI slot 1 or 2 or the system
board caused the error.
Action
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a problem with the
integrated Ethernet controller, have
your system serviced.
2. If you cannot isolate the failing
adapter from the information in the
error log, try to determine the
failing adapter by removing one
adapter at a time from PCI bus A
(PCI slot 1 and 2) and restarting
the server after each adapter is
removed.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
PCI BUS B
An error occurred on PCI bus B. An
adapter in PCI slot 3, 4, or 5 or the
system board caused the error.
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a problem with the
integrated SCSI controller, have the
system serviced.
2. If you cannot correct the problem
from the information in the error
log, try to determine the failing
adapter by removing one adapter
at a time from PCI bus B (PCI slots
3–5) and restarting the server after
each adapter is removed.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
HDD
A hot-swap hard disk drive has failed
on bus 1.
1. Check the error log for additional
information. If the error log
indicates a temperature problem
and the fans are working correctly,
have the system serviced.
2. If the amber Hard Disk Status LED
on one of the hot-swap hard disk
drives is on, and you have an
optional RAID adapter installed,
refer to the documentation provided
with the adapter for more
information.
NMI
A nonmaskable interrupt occurred.
1. If the PCI BUS A or PCI BUS B
LED is on, follow the instructions
for those LEDs.
2. If the PCI BUS A or PCI BUS B
LED is not on, restart the server.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Chapter 6. Solving problems
155
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Table 9 (Page 3 of 4). Light path diagnostics
System Error
LED (operator
information
panel)
Lit LED on
diagnostic LED
panel
Cause
On (continued)
SMI
A systems management event
occurred.
Action
1. Check the system error log for
more information.
2. If the problem persists, restart the
server.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
SERVICE
PROCESSOR
BUS
An error has occurred on the service
processor bus.
Disconnect the server from all electrical
sources, wait for 30 seconds,
reconnect the server to the electrical
sources and restart the server.
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
POWER
SUPPLY 1
Power supply 1 has failed.
Replace power supply 1.
POWER
SUPPLY 2
Power supply 2 has failed.
Replace power supply 2.
POWER
SUPPLY 3
Power supply 3 has failed.
Replace power supply 3.
POWER
SUPPLY NON
REDUNDANT
Power supply redundancy has been
lost.
1. If one of the power supply LEDs is
on, replace the indicated power
supply.
2. Install an additional power supply
to regain redundancy.
FAN 1
Fan 1 has failed or is operating too
slowly.
Replace fan 1.
Notes:
1. An LED on the failing fan assembly
will also be on.
2. A failing fan can also cause the
TEMPERATURE and HDD LEDs to
be on.
FAN 2
Fan 2 has failed or is operating too
slowly.
Replace fan 2.
Notes:
1. An LED on the failing fan assembly
will also be on.
2. A failing fan can also cause the
TEMPERATURE and HDD LEDs to
be on.
FAN 3
Fan 3 has failed or is operating too
slowly.
Notes:
1. An LED on the failing fan assembly
will also be on.
2. A failing fan can also cause the
TEMPERATURE and HDD LEDs to
be on.
156
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Replace fan 3.
Identifying problems using status LEDs
Table 9 (Page 4 of 4). Light path diagnostics
System Error
LED (operator
information
panel)
Lit LED on
diagnostic LED
panel
Cause
On (continued)
TEMPERATURE
The system temperature has exceeded
a threshold level.
Action
1. Check to see if a fan has failed. If
it has, replace the fan.
2. Make sure the room temperature is
not too hot. (See “Specifications”
on page 170.)
If the problem persists, have the
system serviced.
Off
None
The light path diagnostics have not
detected a system error.
None
Chapter 6. Solving problems
157
Checking the system for damage
Checking the system for damage
This section provides instructions on what to do if your server might be damaged.
After dropping it
Look for loose cables and obvious damage. If any cables are loose, reconnect
them securely. If there is obvious damage to the server, have it serviced.
If you see no damage, turn on the server. If it works correctly, the server probably
did not suffer any damage. Observe all electrostatic precautions listed in this book
to avoid damage to your server.
If the server does not work correctly, turn it off and check the adapters and memory
modules to ensure that they are connected correctly. Go to “Electrical safety” on
page 41 and follow the instructions for opening your server; then, reseat all
adapters and memory modules.
If the server still does not work correctly, run the diagnostic tests from diagnostic
utility menu. For information about running tests, see “Running diagnostic
programs” on page 110.
After spilling liquid on it
If liquid gets on the keyboard:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn off the server.
Unplug the keyboard from the back of the server.
Turn the keyboard upside down to drain excess liquid.
Dry off the keyboard with a lint-free cloth.
After the keyboard is completely dry, plug it in and turn on the server. If it does not
work correctly, have the keyboard serviced.
If liquid gets inside the monitor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn off the monitor.
Turn off the server.
Unplug the monitor from the server and the electrical outlet.
Have the monitor serviced immediately.
If liquid gets inside the server:
1. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Unplug the server from the electrical outlet and all attached devices.
3. Have the server serviced immediately.
158
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Replacing the battery
Replacing the battery
IBM has designed this product with your safety in mind. The lithium battery must
be handled correctly to avoid possible danger. If you replace the battery, you must
adhere to the following instructions.
2
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354
or an equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If
your system has a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only
with the same module type made by the same manufacturer. The
battery contains lithium and can explode if not properly used, handled,
or disposed of.
Do not:
– Throw or immerse into water
– Heat to more than 100°C (212°F)
– Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
Note: In the U.S., call 1-800-IBM-4333 for information about battery disposal.
If you replace the original lithium battery with a heavy-metal battery or a battery
with heavy-metal components, be aware of the following environmental
consideration. Batteries and accumulators that contain heavy metals must not be
disposed of with normal domestic waste. They will be taken back free of charge by
the manufacturer, distributor, or representative, to be recycled or disposed of in a
proper manner.
To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-772-2227 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and Canada,
call your IBM reseller or IBM marketing representative.
Before you begin:
Ÿ Read “Electrical safety” on page 41 and “Handling static-sensitive devices”
on page 42.
Ÿ Follow any special handling and installation instructions supplied with the
replacement battery.
Note: After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure your server and reset
the system date and time.
To replace the battery:
1. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect all external cables
and power cords (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43); then remove
the cover (see “Removing the left-side cover (tower model)” on page 47 or
“Removing the cover (rack model)” on page 48).
Chapter 6. Solving problems
159
Replacing the battery
2. Locate the battery on the system board (see “System board component
locations” on page 173).
3. Remove adapters to allow access to the battery. (See “Installing a hot-plug
PCI adapter” on page 55 for information about installing and removing adapters
from the hot-plug PCI slots.)
4. Remove the plastic dividers between the hot-swap PCI slots to allow access to
the battery.
5. Remove the battery:
a. Use one finger to lift the battery clip over the battery.
b. Use one finger to slightly slide the battery toward the rear of the server.
The spring mechanism behind the battery will push it out toward you as you
slide it forward.
c. Use your thumb and index finger to pull the battery from under the battery
clip.
d. Ensure that the battery clip is touching the base of the battery socket by
pressing gently on the clip.
6. Insert the new battery:
a. Tilt the battery so that you can insert it into the front of the socket, under
the battery clip.
b. As you slide it under the battery clip, press the battery down into the
socket.
7. Reinstall any adapters you removed. (See “Installing a hot-plug PCI adapter”
on page 55 for information about installing and removing adapters from the
hot-plug PCI slots.)
8. Reinstall any plastic dividers that you removed.
9. Reinstall the top cover and complete the installation (see “Completing the
installation” on page 84).
160
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Replacing the battery
Note: You will have to wait approximately 20 seconds after you plug the
power cord of your server into an electrical outlet for the Power Control
button to become active.
10. Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program and set configuration parameters
as needed.
Ÿ To set the system date and time, go to “Date and Time” on page 22.
Ÿ To set the power-on password, go to “Using the power-on password menu”
on page 23.
Ÿ To reconfigure your server, follow the instructions given in “The
Configuration/Setup Utility program” on page 19 (all models).
Chapter 6. Solving problems
161
Replacing the battery
162
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Record the identification numbers
Chapter 7. Server records and specifications
Whenever you add options to your server, be sure to update the information in this
chapter. Accurate, up-to-date records make it easier to add other options and, if
the need should arise, to report a hardware problem.
In addition to server records, this chapter contains specifications. These
specifications include product dimensions, environmental operating requirements,
system board and processor board layouts, and jumper settings.
This chapter contains:
Record the identification numbers . . . . . . .
Installed device records . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing jumper positions . . . . . . . . . . .
Two-pin jumper blocks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three-pin jumper blocks . . . . . . . . . . .
System board component locations . . . . . .
System board jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Processor board component locations . . . . .
Processor board jumper and switches . . . . .
Bypassing an unknown power-on password
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
164
170
171
171
172
173
174
175
175
176
Record the identification numbers
Record and retain the following information.
Table 10. IBM Netfinity 5600 identification numbers
Product Name
IBM Netfinity 5600
Machine Type
Model
Serial Number
Key Serial Number
The server serial number and other identification numbers are located on labels on
the rear of the server and on the front of the server under the trim bezel.
Note: Your server keys cannot be duplicated by locksmiths. If you lose them,
order replacement keys from the key manufacturer. The key serial number
and phone number of the manufacturer are on a tag attached to the keys.
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
163
Installed device records
Installed device records
Use the following tables to keep a record of the options installed in, or attached to,
your system. You can also record your system's default configuration settings.
This information can be helpful when you install additional options in your server or
if you ever need to have your server serviced. Copy these tables before recording
information in them, in case you need extra space to write new values later, when
you update your system's configuration.
Note: If necessary, you can also refer to the system-board layout in “System
board component locations” on page 173 for connector locations.
In the following table record the types and SCSI IDs for drives or devices attached
to your server. If you attach a drive or other device to an adapter, be sure to
record the descriptive information properly.
Table 11. Internal and external drives and devices
Location
Drive or Device Description
Internal Devices
Diskette Drive Bay
CD-ROM Drive Bay
Bay A
Bay B
SCSI ID 0 bay
SCSI ID 1 bay (rack)
SCSI ID 2 bay (tower)
SCSI ID 3 bay
SCSI ID 4 bay
SCSI ID 5 bay (rack)
SCSI ID 8 bay (tower)
SCSI ID 9 bay
External Devices
SCSI ID
SCSI ID
SCSI ID
SCSI ID
SCSI ID
SCSI ID
164
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Installed device records
Table 12 shows the Configuration/Setup Utility program defaults. In the table, record any configuration
changes you make.
Table 12 (Page 1 of 4). Configuration/Setup Utility program defaults and changes
Option
Default Value
New Value
Additional Information
System Summary
Processor 11
Processor 1 Speed
Processor 1 Cache Size
Processor 21
Math Coprocessor
Internal
System Memory
640 KB
Extended Memory
127 MB
Shadow RAM
384 KB
System ROM
F000h — FFFFh
Diskette Drive A
1.44 MB 3.5"
Primary Master Device
CD-ROM
Primary Slave Device
Mouse
Installed
System Memory Type
Registered SDRAM
1 All microprocessors must be the same type and have the same cache size and clock speed.
System Information
Product Data
BIOS Build Level
BIOS Date
BIOS Revision Level
BootBlock Build Level
SP ROM Build Level
SP ROM Date
SP ROM Revision Level
Diagnostics Build Level
Diagnostics Date
Diagnostics Revision Level
SCSI BIOS Version
Machine Type/System Serial Number
Machine Type/Model
System Serial Number
System Card Data
Model
Submodel
System Serial
Planar
FRU Number
Unique Number
Mfg ID
Slot Number
Processor
FRU Number
Unique Number
Mfg ID
Slot Number
Chapter 7. Server records and specifications
165
Installed device records
Table 12 (Page 2 of 4). Configuration/Setup Utility program defaults and changes
Option
Default Value
System Information (cont.)
DASD Backplane
FRU Number
Unique Number
Mfg ID
Slot Number
Power Backplane
FRU Number
Unique Number
Mfg ID
Slot Number
Power Supply 1
FRU Number
Unique Number
Mfg ID
Slot Number
Power Supply 2
FRU Number
Unique Number
Mfg ID
Slot Number
Devices and I/O Ports
Serial Port A
Serial Port B
Parallel Port
Parallel Port Mode
Parallel Port IRQ
Parallel Port DMA
Mouse
Diskette Controller
Diskette Drive A
Video
Video Controller
Video Memory
IDE Configuration Menu
Primary IDE Channel
Master Device
Device Type
Size
Transfer Selection:
Transfer Mode
LBA Mode
Slave Device
System Security
Power-On Password
Allow for Unattended
Boot with Password
Administrator Password
Power-on Password
Changeable by User
System Owner's Name
166
[ Port 3F8, IRQ 4 ]
[ Port 2F8, IRQ 3 ]
[ Port 378 ]
[ Standard ]
[ IRQ 7 ]
None
[ Installed ]
[ Enabled ]
[ 1.44 MB 3.5" ]
S3 Incorporated
4096 KB
[ Enabled ]
CD-ROM
650 MB
Autoconfigure
PIO Mode 4
Supported
[ Off ]
[ No ]
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
New Value
Additional Information
Installed device records
Table 12 (Page 3 of 4). Configuration/Setup Utility program defaults and changes
Option
Default Value
New Value
Additional Information
Start Options
Keyboard NumLock State
[ On ]
Keyboard Speed
[ Fast ]
Disketteless Operation Mode
[ Disabled ]
Displayless Operation Mode
[ Disabled ]
Keyboardless Operation Mode
[ Disabled ]
First Startup Device
[ CD-ROM ]
Second Startup Device
[ Diskette Drive 0 ]
Third Startup Device
[ Hard Drive 0 ]
Fourth Startup Device
[ Disabled ]
Boot Fail Count
[ Enabled ]
Power On Self-Test
[ Quick ]
Virus Detection3
[ Enabled ]
3The Virus Detection test checks for changes to the boot sector.
System Boot Precedence
[ Disabled ]
Advanced Setup
Processor Serial Number Access
Core Chipset Control
North Bridge Revision
IOQ Depth
PCI 2.1 Non Compliant
Adapter Support
Slot 1 Grant Timer
Slot 2 Grant Timer
Slot 3 Grant Timer
Slot 4 Grant Timer
Slot 5 Grant Timer
Cache Control
Processor Cache Type
Processor 1 Cache State
Processor 1 Cache Size
Processor 2 Cache State
Processor 2 Cache Size
PCI Slot/Device Information
Slot 0
Bus
Dev
Function
Device Type
Slot 1
Bus
Dev
Function
Device Type
Slot 2
Bus
Dev
Function
Device Type
[ Disabled ]
[ 2.1 ]
[8]
[ Disabled ]
[
[
[
[
[
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
Disabled
]
]
]
]
]
[ Write-Back ]
[ Enabled ]
Host Bridge
Chapter 7. Server records and specifications
167
Installed device records
Table 12 (Page 4 of 4). Configuration/Setup Utility program defaults and changes
Option
Advanced Setup (cont.)
Slot 3
Bus
Dev
Function
Device Type
Slot 4
Bus
Dev
Function
Device Type
Slot 5
Bus
Dev
Function
Device Type
PCI Device Control
Planar SCSI
Planar Video
Planar Ethernet
Slot 1
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Memory Settings
J04: Row 0
J04: Row 1
J03: Row 2
J03: Row 3
J02: Row 4
J02: Row 5
J01: Row 6
J01: Row 7
Sys. Service Proc. HW Int. (IRQ)
168
Default Value
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
Row Is Empty ]
Row Is Empty ]
Row Is Empty ]
Row Is Empty ]
Row Is Empty ]
Row Is Empty ]
Row Is Enabled ]
Row Is Empty ]
Autoconfigure ]
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
New Value
Additional Information
Installed device records
Record the system memory (DIMMs) installed in your server in the following table.
Table 13. System memory
Memory Connector
DIMM Size
Connector J1
Connector J2
Connector J3
Connector J4
Total Memory (MB)
128
128
128
128
MB
MB
MB
MB
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Additional Information
256
256
256
256
MB
MB
MB
MB
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
512
512
512
512
MB
MB
MB
MB
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
1
1
1
1
GB
GB
GB
GB
Ø
Ø
Ø
Ø
Record expansion slot configuration information for your server in the following table.
Table 14. Expansion slot configuration information
Expansion Slot
IRQ
DMA
I/O Port
Memory Resources
Option Description and
Additional Information
PCI slot 1
PCI slot 2
PCI slot 3
PCI slot 4
PCI slot 5
Notes:
1. PCI slots 3–5 are hot-plug slots.
2. Before setting values, review “Resolving configuration conflicts” on page 29 and follow the instructions for avoiding
configuration conflicts.
Chapter 7. Server records and specifications
169
Specifications
The following table contains the specifications for the Netfinity 5600 server.
Table 15. Netfinity 5600 server operating specifications
Size (Tower Model)
– Depth: 659.3 mm (26 in.)
– Height: 426.5 mm (16.8 in.)
– Width: 217.3 mm (8.6 in.)
Size (Rack Model)
Electrical Input
Ÿ Sine-wave input (50 to 60 Hz) is
required
Ÿ Input voltage:
– Low range:
- Minimum: 90 V ac
– Depth: 629.3 mm (24.8 in.)
– Height: 217.3 mm (8.6 in.)
(5 U)
- Maximum: 137 V ac
– High range:
– Width: 426.6 mm (16.8 in.)
- Minimum: 180 V ac
Weight (Tower Model)
Ÿ Minimum configuration: 26.6 kg
(58.6 lb)
- Maximum: 265 V ac
– Input kilovolt-amperes (kVA)
approximately:
Ÿ Maximum configuration: 37.5 kg
(82.7 lb)
- Minimum configuration as
shipped: 0.08 kVA
- Maximum configuration:
0.52 kVA
Weight (Rack Model)
Ÿ Minimum configuration: 25.3 kg
(55.7 lb)
Ÿ Maximum configuration: 36.2 kg
(79.8 lb)
Environment
Ÿ Air temperature:
– Server on: 10° to 35° C
(50° to 95° F)
Altitude: 0 to 914 m (3000 ft.)
– Server on: 10° to 32° C
(50° to 90° F)
Altitude: 914 m (3000 ft.) to
2133 m (7000 ft.)
– Server off: 10° to 43° C
(50° to 110° F)
Maximum Altitude: 2133 m
(7000 ft.)
Ÿ Humidity:
– Server on: 8% to 80%
– Server off: 8% to 80%
Ÿ Maximum altitude: 2133 m
(7000 ft)
170
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Power Available for Drives
Ÿ Each hot-swap drive bay:
–
+5 V dc line: 15 A
–
+12 V dc line: 17.2 A
Heat Output
Ÿ Approximate heat output in British
Thermal Units (Btu) per hour:
– Minimum configuration:
683 Btu (200 watts)
– Maximum configuration:
2048 Btu (600 watts)
Acoustical Noise Emissions Values
Ÿ Sound power, idling: 6.6 bel
maximum
Ÿ Sound power, operating: 6.8 bel
maximum
Ÿ Sound pressure, operating: 67 dBa
maximum
Changing jumper positions
Changing jumper positions
Jumpers located on the system board and the processor board help you to
customize the way your server operates.
Your system board and processor board contain two-pin and three-pin jumper
blocks.
In some cases, groups of jumpers might combine to define a function.
Two-pin jumper blocks
Covering both pins with a jumper defines one function of the jumper block. To
change the function of the jumper block, cover one pin only or remove the jumper
entirely.
The following illustration identifies pins 1 and 2 on a two-pin jumper block.
2
1
To change a jumper's position for a two-pin jumper block:
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the server power cords.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43).
3. Do one of the following:
Ÿ Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.
Ÿ Align the holes in the bottom of the jumper with the two pins on the pin
block, and then slide the jumper onto these pins.
Ÿ Align one of the holes in the bottom of the jumper with one of the pins on
the pin block, and then slide the jumper onto that pin only.
Chapter 7. Server records and specifications
171
Changing jumper positions
4. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables (see “Completing the
installation” on page 84).
Three-pin jumper blocks
With the three-pin jumper blocks, each jumper covers two of the three pins on a pin
block. You can position the jumper to fit over the center pin and either of the other
two pins.
The following illustration identifies pins 1, 2, and 3 on a three-pin jumper block.
3
2
1
To change a jumper's position for a three-pin jumper block:
1. Turn off the server; then, disconnect the server power cords.
2. Remove the server cover (see “Preparing to install options” on page 43).
3. Lift the jumper straight off the pin block.
4. Align the holes in the bottom of the jumper with the center pin and the pin that
was not covered previously.
5. Slide the jumper fully onto these pins.
6. Reinstall the server cover and connect the cables (see “Completing the
installation” on page 84).
172
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
System board component locations
System board component locations
The following illustration shows a layout of the system board and identifies
system-board components. You might need to refer to this figure before you install
hardware in your server, or when you record information in the tables in this
chapter.
.1/ Dual serial and PCI hot-plug control switch connector (J1)
.2/ Microprocessor board connector (J4, J8)
.3/ Operator information panel connector (J29)
.4/ Reserved (J32)
.5/ Reserved (J10)
.6/ Diskette drive connector (J23)
.7/ Diagnostic LED panel connector (J6)
.8/ Reserved (J17)
.9/ Internal LVD (low voltage differential) SCSI connector (J25) (with extender
cable on bracket)
.1ð/ PCI slots 1 and 2 (on primary PCI bus A)
.11/ IDE connector (J27)
.12/ Power control and reset panel cable connector (J18)
.13/ Advanced System Management Interconnect connector (J35)
.14/ Battery
.15/ PCI (hot-plug) slots 3–5 (on primary PCI bus B)
.16/ Jumper block (J20)
.17/ PCI slot Power Good LEDs
.18/ Internal PCI slot Attention LEDs
.19/ External PCI slot Attention LEDs
.2ð/ Advanced System Management adapter connector (J21)
.21/ External LVD SCSI/Parallel port connectors (J19)
.22/ Serial/video port connectors (J11)
.23/ USB 1 and USB 2 port connectors (J9) (USB 2 is below USB 1.)
.24/ Ethernet port connector (J7)
Chapter 7. Server records and specifications
173
System board jumpers
.25/ Mouse and keyboard connectors (J5) (The mouse connector is above the
keyboard connector.)
System board jumpers
Table 16 describes the jumpers on the system board. The numbers in the table
correspond to the highlighted numbers on the illustration in “System board
component locations” on page 173.
Note: Turn off the server, and disconnect the power cords before moving any
jumpers.
The following illustration shows pin positions for the system board jumper J20. Pin
1 is the pin at the upper-left corner of J20 in the illustration of the system board in
“System board component locations” on page 173.
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
Table 16. System board jumper (J20)
174
Jumper Pin Positions
Description
Pins 1–3
The default is no jumper on pins 1 , 2, and 3.
Pins 4–6
The default is a jumper on pins 4 and 5.
Pins 7–9
The default is a jumper on pins 8 and 9.
Pins 10–12
The default is a jumper on pins 10 and 11.
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Processor board jumper and switches
Processor board component locations
A layout of the processor board is shown in the following illustration.
.1/ DIMM connector 4 (J1)
.2/ DIMM connector 3 (J2)
.3/ DIMM connector 2 (J3)
.4/ DIMM connector 1 (J4)
.5/ Microprocessor 2 connector (U6)
.6/ Reserved (J15)
.7/ Microprocessor 2 Error LED (CR13)
.8/ Reserved (J19)
.9/ Power supply connector (J6)
.1ð/ Power supply connector (J11)
.11/ Power supply connector (J12)
.12/ Power supply connector (J14)
.13/ VRM 2 connector (J13)
.14/ VRM 2 Error LED (CR19)
.15/ VRM 1 Error LED (CR17)
.16/ VRM 1 connector (J5)
.17/ Fans 1 and 2 connector (J8)
.18/ Switch block 2 (SW2)
.19/ Switch block 1 (SW1) (might not be present on your server)
.2ð/ Microprocessor 1 Error LED (CR12)
.21/ Microprocessor 1 connector (U5)
.22/ System board connectors (J9 and J25) (on reverse side of processor
board)
.23/ DIMM 1 Error LED (CR8)
.24/ DIMM 2 Error LED (CR9)
.25/ DIMM 3 Error LED (CR10)
.26/ DIMM 4 Error LED (CR11)
.27/ Fan 3 connector (J10)
Processor board jumper and switches
Table 17 on page 176 contains the description of the jumper block located on the
processor board. Table 18 on page 176 shows the switch settings for switch block
2. The highlighted numbers in the tables refer to the highlighted numbers in the
illustration in “Processor board component locations.”
Chapter 7. Server records and specifications
175
Bypassing an unknown power-on password
Notes:
1. Turn off the server, and disconnect the power cords before moving any jumpers
or changing any switch settings.
2. Be sure the processor speed switch is set correctly. For a 600/100 MHz2
microprocessor, switch 2 of switch block 2 (SW2) must be set to ON. See
Table 18 on page 176.
Attention: If switch 2 of switch block 2 is set incorrectly, components might
overheat and component damage might occur. Be sure that the microprocessor
core-frequency selection is properly set.
Table 17. Processor board jumpers
Jumper name
Description
.6/ J15 Reserved
The default position is a jumper on pins 2 and 3.
Table 18. Processor board switch block 2 (SW2) Settings
Switch
Name
Description
1
BIOS Recovery
The default position is OFF.
2
Processor Speed
The default position is ON
(100 MHz). Changing the
switch position to OFF sets
the system bus speed to
133 MHz.
3
Reserved
The default position is OFF.
4
Bypass Power On Password
The default position is OFF.
Changing the switch position
to ON bypasses the power-on
password check.
Bypassing an unknown power-on password
When a power-on password is set, POST does not complete until you enter the
password. If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the
server through either of the following methods:
Ÿ Enter the administrator password at the power-on prompt, if an administrator
password has been set. (If necessary, see “Using the administrator password
menu” on page 24 for details.) Start the Configuration/Setup Utility program
and change the power-on password. See “Using the power-on password
menu” on page 23.
Ÿ Change switch 4 of switch block 2 (SW2) to the ON position to bypass the
power-on password check. You can then start the Configuration/Setup Utility
program and change the power-on password. See “Using the power-on
password menu” on page 23.
2
600 MHz denotes internal clock speed of the microprocessor only; other factors also affect application performance.
176
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Appendix A. I²O-compliant statement
I2O is a new standard architecture for intelligent I/O that offloads low-level interrupts
from the server processor to input/output processors (IOPs) designed specifically to
handle I/O. I2O-compliant adapters can improve I/O performance in high-bandwidth
applications, such as client/server processing, video, and groupware.
The Netfinity 5600 server is intended to support I2O-compliant (deep) adapters as
listed in the ServerProven program. A deep adapter is a PCI card that has an
embedded input/output processor (IOP). For the deep adapter to function correctly,
the following items are needed:
Ÿ An operating system vendor-provided operating system service module (OSM)
that supports the class of adapter (such as storage) that is being installed in
the server.
Ÿ A PCI card vendor-provided hardware device module (HDM).
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
177
178
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Appendix B. Power cords
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and
plug with a properly grounded outlet.
IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.
IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.
IBM power
cord part
number
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
Used in these countries and regions
13F9940
Argentina, Australia, China (PRC), New Zealand, Papua New Guinea,
Paraguay, Uruguay, Western Samoa
13F9979
Afghanistan, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Austria, Belgium, Benin, Bulgaria,
Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cameroon, Central African Rep., Chad, Czech
Republic, Egypt, Finland, France, French Guiana, Germany, Greece, Guinea,
Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Iran, Ivory Coast, Jordan, Lebanon, Luxembourg,
Macau, Malagasy, Mali, Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Monaco, Morocco,
Mozambique, Netherlands, New Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal,
Romania, Senegal, Slovakia, Spain, Sudan, Sweden, Syria, Togo, Tunisia,
Turkey, former USSR, Vietnam, former Yugoslavia, Zaire, Zimbabwe
13F9997
Denmark
14F0015
Bangladesh, Burma, Pakistan, South Africa, Sri Lanka
14F0033
Antigua, Bahrain, Brunei, Channel Islands, Cyprus, Dubai, Fiji, Ghana, Hong
Kong, India, Iraq, Ireland, Kenya, Kuwait, Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Nepal,
Nigeria, Polynesia, Qatar, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Tanzania, Uganda, United
Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia
14F0051
Liechtenstein, Switzerland
14F0069
Chile, Ethiopia, Italy, Libya, Somalia
14F0087
Israel
1838574
Thailand
179
IBM power
cord part
number
62X1045
180
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Used in these countries and regions
Bahamas, Barbados, Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Guatemala,
Guyana, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Japan, Korea (South), Liberia, Mexico,
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia,
Suriname, Taiwan, Trinidad (West Indies), United States of America,
Venezuela
Index
Numerics
1-800 telephone assistance 159
100BASE-TX transceiver 96
10BASE-T transceiver 96
16-bit
cable required 68, 89
connector on SCSI backplane 68
SCSI IDs supported 69
2-drop SCSI cable 68
25-pin parallel port 3, 12
9-pin serial port 3, 12
9-pin-to-25-pin adapter 12
A
about this book xi
AC Power light 14
accessing
Configuration/Setup Utility program 19, 24
SCSISelect Utility program 31
acoustical output of server 170
activity light, hard disk drive 8
adapter
bus-master 52
compatibility 3, 54
considerations 54
deactivated 30
Ethernet, configuring 34
hot-plug 52
installation sequence 29
installing
general information 52
hot-plug 55
non-hot-plug 59
locations 165
network, compatibility with device drivers 60
PCI locations 53
PCI slots 169
RAID 60
requirements 52
slot locations 53
starting from 26
types 53
using, with external devices 89
video 52, 151
working with 52
adding
adapter
general information 52
hot-plug 55
non-hot-plug 59
 Copyright IBM Corp. 1999
adding (continued)
external options 89
hot-swap fan assembly 82
internal drive 66, 67, 68
memory 64
power supply 78
address
COM port 91
Dictionary of Computing xi, 1
parallel port 92
registering your server 1
server product information 1
USB 97
adjusting
chair 15
controls 16
lighting 16
monitor 15
administrator password
deleting 25
features 22
forgotten 24
purpose 24
setting 25
Advanced Setup
Advanced System Management Processor (system
service processor) 28
cache control 27
memory settings 28
PCI slot/device information 27
system service processor 28
Advanced System Management Interconnect
knockout 11
port 3
Advanced System Management Processor 28
connector 12
description 4
time configuration 22
advantages of product 1, 67
air circulation
around server 15, 16
rack guidelines 100
air vents 16
allocating system resources 27
altitude of server 170
antiglare filter 16
application processor 61
architecture, PCI 27, 52
arranging workspace 15
Attention LEDs for hot-plug PCI slots 53
Attention lights for hot-plug PCI slots 12
181
auxiliary-device connector
availability 5
12
23, 176
C
B
back view 11
backing up all files 33
backplane
SCSI, connections to bays 69
banks, memory 64
battery
disposal ix, 159
failure error message 113
handling precautions ix, 159
heavy metal 159
installing 160
location 160
ordering replacements 159
removing 160
replacing 159
bays
drive types and sizes 67, 68
expansion 66, 67
general information
installing drives 67, 69
preinstallation steps 69
hot-swap 72
identification 67
installing a drive in a hot-swap 72
internal drive locations 67, 68, 164
locations 67
non-hot-swap
installing a drive in 69
preinstalled CD-ROM drive 67
beep codes
description 122
during POST 109, 122
list 124
table 124
before you begin 40
bezel
installing 85, 88
removing 50
BIOS (basic input/output system)
blank screen 144
boot
See startup
boot processor 61
broken cover lock 144
bus
PCI 54
universal serial 3
bus master
adapters 52
capability 11
182
bypassing power-on password
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
cables
2-drop SCSI 68
category 5 34, 96, 149
connecting
before installing adapter 58, 59
safety requirements viii
to a non-hot-swap drive 71
to an adapter 58, 60
connector on SCSI backplane 68
crossover 149
disconnecting
from back of server 41, 44
from electrical outlets 41, 44
from external receptacles 41
safety requirements viii
for bidirectional parallel ports 22
lengths 16
list of available power cables 179
maximum lengths for SCSI devices 89
power viii, 14
removing 44
requirements
attaching external devices 96
Fast Ethernet 34
requirements for attaching external devices
safety viii
SCSI 89
cache
control 27
level-1 size 3
Level-2 size 3
cache control 27
cage nut
calculating maximum SCSI cable lengths 89
card
See adapter
Category 5 cables 34, 96, 149
caution
battery handling ix, 159
handling static-sensitive devices 42
laser compliance statement x
lifting the server 2, 44
power 8, 44
rack model 99
removing cover 41
removing covers 41
CD
cleaning 143
eject/load button 8
CD-ROM drive
in-use light 9
laser compliance statement x
89
CD-ROM drive (continued)
locations 67
manual tray-release opening 9
preinstalled 66, 67
problems 143
sizes 68
chair adjustments 15
changing
configuration settings 20
hardware configuration 151
jumper positions 171
memory addresses 30
port assignments 21, 91, 92
SCSI controller settings 31
software configuration 151
termination on SCSI devices 69
channels, SCSI 89
channels, ServeRAID
circulation, air 16
cleaning the monitor 16
clock
real-time 113
comfort 15
communication
requirements viii
communication port 91
compatibility
adapter 52, 54
video controller 3
completing the installation 84
configuration
adapter conflicts 151
adapter installation sequence 29
adapter locations 165
changing hardware 151
changing software 151
Configuration/Setup Utility program 19
conflicts 29, 151
default settings
device records 165
load default settings 28
device change 113
device records 165, 169
EEPROM 19
errors 19
Ethernet adapter 34
Ethernet controller 34
Ethernet failover
IntraNetWare 37
OS/2 35
Windows NT Server 36, 37
hardware change 125
memory change 114
memory-address conflicts 151
option conflicts 151
peripheral component interconnect (PCI)
27
configuration (continued)
power-on self-test (POST) 18
restoring 20, 28
universal serial bus (USB) 22
utility programs 18
Configuration/Setup Utility program
administrator password 24
configuring devices 21
configuring I/O ports 21
controlling access to 24
defining system security 22
main menu 20
power-on password 23
setting Advanced System Management Processor
time 22
setting date and time 22
setting passwords 22, 24
setting service processor time 22
starting 19
configure/view host adapter settings 31
configuring your server 18, 88
conflicts, configuration 29, 151
connecting
adapter 52
cables
requirements for external devices 89
external options 89
internal drives, all bays 66, 67
connectors
Advanced System Management Interconnect 3, 11
auxiliary device 94
descriptions 11
device records 165
Ethernet 12, 96
expansion slots 52
input/output 90
input/output locations 11
keyboard 3, 12, 93
list of 3
management port C 12, 91
memory 64, 65
monitor 3, 12
mouse 3, 12
parallel device 3, 12, 166
parallel port 92
pointing device 3, 12
power 12, 14
printer 12
rear view of server 11
SCSI 3, 12, 95
serial device 3, 12
serial port 91
systems management port 91
universal serial bus (USB) 3, 97
universal serial bus 1 12
universal serial bus 2 12
Index
183
connectors (continued)
USB 1 12
USB 2 12
video 12, 93
considerations
cable requirements 89
environmental 159
installing
adapters 54
external SCSI devices
internal drives 67
controller
Ethernet 34, 96, 136
Ethernet, problems 149
network 96
SCSI 31
video 52, 151
controls
devices supported 89
front panel 7
server 7
cord, power 179
core chipset control 27
cover
rack
installing 84
removing 48
tower
installing 87
removing 47
cover lock, broken 144
CPU LED 154
customer assistance
error messages 109
ordering publications xii
telephone numbers xii
89
D
daisy-chain cable 11
damaged system
dropped 158
spilled liquid 158
DASD (direct access storage device)
See drive
See hard disk drive
date and time 22
date, setting 22
DC Power light 14
deactivated adapters 30
deep adapters 177
default
configuration values 165
settings, default 28
values for Configuration/Setup Utility program
184
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
165
defective hard disk drive 75
deleting
power-on password 176
deleting administrator password 25
deleting power-on password 23, 24
description
drive 66, 67
hot-swap drive 67
integrated video controller 52
SCSI IDs 68
design considerations 1
device
adapter locations 165
configuration error 113
drivers, compatibility with network adapters
external 89
locations 164, 165, 169
mouse problems 145
number supported 89
pointing device problems 145
port assignments 21
preinstalled 66, 67
records 165
resources 27
SCSI 68
startup sequence 26
static-sensitive, handling 42
device records, updating 88
diagnosing server problems 143
diagnostic log, viewing 111
diagnostic utility programs
equipment 111
error messages 125
messages, error 125
running 110
starting 110
diagnostics
description, test programs 108
error messages 109
light path 153
POST (power-on self-test) 108
POST beep codes 109
tools overview 108
Dictionary of Computing xi, 1
DIMM 64
disabling
Ethernet controller 27
hot-plug PCI slot 55
PCI slot 27
SCSI controller 27
video controller 27
disconnecting
cables
before installing options 44
hot-swap drives 75
power supply 80
60
disk utility, SCSI 32
diskette drives
eject button 7
in-use light 8
installing 69
preinstalled 66
problems 29, 143
sizes 68
diskettes, option 110
display
See monitor
disposing of batteries ix, 159
DMA (direct memory access)
resources 27
door
installing 86
removing 49
door lock 3
drive
bays 67
description 66, 67
full-high 67
half-high 67
hot-swap 67
identification 67
installation hardware for 67
installation requirements 67
installing
all bays 66, 67, 69
hot-swap 72
removable media 69
location
by drive type 68
device records 164
illustration 67
non-hot-swap 69
position 69
preinstalled 66, 67
removing a hot-swap 75
SCSI 68
setting switches and jumpers 69
sizes 67
status indicators 8
types 66, 67
drivers
compatibility with network adapters 60
software conflicts 30
dropped server 158
dual inline memory module (DIMM) 64
See also memory-module kits
duplicate keys 163
E
eject switch
CD-ROM 8
eject switch (continued)
diskette drive 7
electrical outlets 16
electrical requirement 170
electrical safety viii, 41
electromagnetic interference (EMI) 67
enabling
Ethernet controller 27
PCI slot 27
SCSI controller 27
video controller 27
enhanced parallel port (EPP) 21
environmental considerations 159
error logs 110
error messages
Advanced System Management Processor diagnostic
(165) 131
battery failure 113
CD-ROM diagnostic (215) 134
core system diagnostic (001) 127
description 109
device configuration 113
diagnostic 109, 125
diskette drive diagnostic (206) 134
Ethernet 136
Ethernet diagnostic (301) 135
Ethernet diagnostic (302) 135
Ethernet diagnostic (405) 135
event/error logs 28
hard disk drive diagnostic (217) 134
magnetic tape drive diagnostic (264) 134
memory configuration 114
microprocessor diagnostic (089) 130
modem diagnostic (415) 136
NDIS 2.01 (OS/2) driver 139
NDIS 4.0 driver 140
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
diagnostic (165) 131
NetWare or IntraNetWare ODI driver 136
numeric 112
parallel port diagnostic (014) 127
PCI interface diagnostic (020) 128
POST 112
POST messages 109
power supply diagnostic (075) 130
RAID diagnostic (035) 128
SCO UNIX driver 141
SCSI interface diagnostic (030) 128
serial port diagnostic (011) 127
software-generated 109
status display diagnostic (180) 132
system cache diagnostic (202) 133
system memory diagnostic (201) 132
thermal system diagnostic (175) 131
types 109
USB port interface diagnostic (015) 127
Index
185
error messages (continued)
video system diagnostic (005) 127
Ethernet adapter
configuring 34
redundant 34
Ethernet controller
configuration 34
connector 12, 96
disabling 27
error messages 136
failover feature 34
NIC 34
primary controller 34
redundant adapter 34
SCO UNIX driver messages 141
secondary controller 34
troubleshooting 149
Ethernet Link Status light 10, 149, 150
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps light 10, 149
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity light 10, 149, 150
event/error logs 28
exiting from the Configuration/Setup Utility
program 20, 28
expansion bays 66, 67
expansion enclosure problems 148
expansion slots
adapter installation 59
adapter locations 53, 165, 169
description 52
hot-swap PCI adapter installation 55
location 11, 12
extended capabilities port (ECP) 21
extended data output (EDO) memory 3
extension cords 16
external
device records 164, 165
options, connecting 89
SCSI 12
SCSI cable
maximum lengths 89
using 89
SCSI connector
rules for using 89
SCSI device IDs 89
views 11, 66
FAN 1 LED 156
FAN 2 LED 156
FAN 3 LED 156
fan assembly, hot-swap 82
Fast Ethernet 34
fatigue 15
features
administrator password 24
at a glance 3
front view 66
hot-swap drives 67
internal 164, 165, 169
PCI, configuring 27
rear view 11
records 164
filler panel
cooling considerations 42
hot-swap drive bay 74
non-hot-swap drive bay 70, 71
power supply bay 14
fixed disk
See hard disk drive
flickering monitor 144
forgotten administrator password 24
forgotten power-on password 23
format, low-level 33
formatting drives 33
front panel controls 7
front view 66
full-high drives 67
F
H
failed hard disk drive 75
failover for Ethernet
configuration for 35
description 34
NIC adapter 34
primary controller 34
secondary controller 34
186
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
G
general information
before installing options 40
controls 7
expansion bays 66
input/output connectors 11
installing drives 67, 69
status indicators 10
general problems 144
glare 16
glossary xi, 1
guidelines for working inside a Netfinity 5600 server
with the power on 43
half-high drives 67
handling static-sensitive devices 42
hard disk drive
activity light 8
arrays, reconfiguring after installing hard disk
drives 74
backplane 68
consequences of removing wrong drive 75
hard disk drive (continued)
HDD LED 155
hot-swap 67
ID, SCSI 69
installing 72
low-level format 33
removing 75
replacing 75
sizes 67, 68
status indicators 8
Status light 8
types 67
Hard Drive Activity light 10
hardfile
See hard disk drive
hardware installation 69
HDD LED 155
heat output of server 170
heavy-metal batteries 159
help
See customer assistance
highlights 1
hot plug
adapter
Ethernet failover
Windows NT Server setup 36
hot-plug PCI adapters 52
Hot-plug PCI slot LEDs 53
hot-swap fan assembly 82
hot-swap parts
advantage 67
description 67
drive
See drive
fan
See fan assembly, hot-swap
power supply
See power supply, hot-swap
humidity of server environment 170
I
I/O board data 21
I/O ports 21, 27
I²O-compliant statement 177
IBM Ethernet controller 34
IBM service center
See telephone numbers, IBM
identification numbers 163
in-use lights
diskette drive 143
problems 144
indicator lights
See lights
Information light 10
input/output (I/O) connectors
See connectors
installation
completing 84
hardware 40, 67, 69
preparation 40
preparing for 43
requirements 67
installing
adapters
general information 52
hot-plug 55
non-hot-plug 59
battery 160
cover 84
DIMM 64
door 86
external options 89
hard disk drives 69, 72
hot-swap drives 67
hot-swap fan assembly 82
internal drives
all bays 67
considerations 67
general information 66, 67
hot-swap 72
left front bay 69
locations 67
preinstallation steps 69
SCSI 68
types and sizes for each bay 68
internal options 39
memory-module kits 64
microprocessor kit 61
network adapters 60
non-hot-swap drives 69
Option Diskettes 110
power supply 78
RAID adapter 60
SCSI drives
server door 86
top cover 84
trim bezel 85, 88
intermittent problems 145
internal
device records 164, 165, 169
drives
considerations 67
installing (all bays) 67
installing (general information) 66, 67
installing (hot-swap) 72
installing (non-hot-swap drive) 69
locations 67, 68
removing (hot-swap) 75
replacing (hot-swap) 75
SCSI 68
sizes 67, 68
Index
187
internal (continued)
maximum SCSI cable lengths 89
options, installed 165
preinstalled 66, 67
SCSI devices, terminating 69
setting jumpers 69
interrupt 27
interrupt levels, assigning (PCI) 27
interrupt request (IRQ)
recording PCI 167
recording serial 166
introduction 1
J
jumpers
changing 171
locations
on processor board 175
microprocessor core-frequency-selection
on internal drives 69
on processor board 175
on system board 174
175
K
keyboard
angle of 15
arm and wrist position 15
connector 3, 12, 93
number lock 26
port 12, 93
problems 145
speed 26
keyboardless operation 167
keys
replacing 163
serial number 163
knockout for external connector
11
L
laser compliance statement x
LEDs (light-emitting diode)
Attention lights for hot-plug PCI slots 12, 53
CPU 153, 154
diagnostic LED panel 153
Ethernet Link Status 10, 149, 150
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps 10, 149
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity 10, 149, 150
FAN 1 153, 156
FAN 2 153, 156
FAN 3 153, 156
for hot-plug PCI slots 53
for hot-swap drives 75
HDD 153, 155
188
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
LEDs (light-emitting diode) (continued)
identifying problems 151
Information 10
MEMORY 153, 154
NMI 153, 155
NON REDUNDANT 153
operator information panel 7
PCI BUS A 153, 155
PCI BUS B 153, 155
Power lights for hot-plug PCI slots 53
power supply 152
POWER SUPPLY 1 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY 2 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY 3 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY NON REDUNDANT 153, 156
Processor 1 Activity 10
Processor 2 Activity 10
processor board 175
SCSI Hard Drive Activity 10
SERVICE PROCESSOR BUS 153, 156
SMI 153, 156
system board 173
System Error 10, 154, 155, 156, 157
System POST Complete 10
System Power 10
TEMPERATURE 153, 157
VRM 153, 154
lifting the server, caution 2
light path diagnostics 153
lighting 16
lights
Attention for hot-plug PCI slots 12, 53
CD-ROM Drive In-Use 9
CPU 153, 154
diagnostic LED panel 153
Diskette Drive In-Use 8
Ethernet Link Status 10, 149, 150
Ethernet Speed 100 Mbps 10, 149
Ethernet Transmit/Receive Activity 10, 149, 150
FAN 1 153, 156
FAN 2 153, 156
FAN 3 153, 156
Hard Disk Activity 8
hard disk drive status 8
Hard Disk Status 8
HDD 153, 155
identifying problems 151
Information 10
MEMORY 153, 154
NMI 153, 155
NON REDUNDANT 153
not working 144
operator information panel 10
PCI BUS A 153, 155
PCI BUS B 153, 155
power supply 152
lights (continued)
POWER SUPPLY 1 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY 2 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY 3 153, 156
POWER SUPPLY NON REDUNDANT 153, 156
power-supply status 14
Processor 1 Activity 10
Processor 2 Activity 10
SCSI Hard Drive Activity 10
SERVICE PROCESSOR BUS 153, 156
SMI 153, 156
System Error 10, 154, 155, 156, 157
System POST Complete 10
System Power 10
TEMPERATURE 153, 157
VRM 153, 154
liquid spilled on server 158
load default settings 28
locations
adapters 52, 53
battery 160
bays 67
devices 164
drives 164
expansion slots 52
features 11, 66
internal drives 67
jumpers
processor board 175
memory 64
memory-module kits 64
processor board jumpers 175
processor board switches 175
server identification numbers 163
server records 164, 165, 169
system board jumpers 174
System Power light 10
termination 69
lock, cover 144
loss of data 75
Low-Level Format program
backing up files 33
overview 33
using 33
when to use 33
M
main menu, Configuration/Setup Utility 20
management port C 91
management port C connector 12
manual tray-release opening for CD-ROM drive
maximum SCSI cable lengths 89
mechanical loading, rack 100
media types 68
9
media-bay trim bezel
installing 85, 88
removing 50
memory
address conflicts 151
bank 64
configuration error 114
default 3
device records 165
list of features 3
problems 146
resources 27
specifications 64
MEMORY LED 154
memory settings 28
memory-module kits 64
menu, Configuration/Setup Utility program
Configuration/Setup Utility 20
configure/view host adapter settings 31
SCSI disk utilities 32
SCSISelect Utility 31
messages
Advanced System Management Processor diagnostic
(165) 131
battery failure 113
CD-ROM diagnostic (215) 134
core system diagnostic (001) 127
device configuration error 113
diagnostic 125
diskette drive diagnostic (206) 134
error 125
Ethernet diagnostic (301) 135
Ethernet diagnostic (302) 135
Ethernet diagnostic (405) 135
hard disk drive diagnostic (217) 134
magnetic tape drive diagnostic (264) 134
memory configuration error 114
microprocessor diagnostic (089) 130
modem diagnostic (415) 136
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
diagnostic (165) 131
parallel port diagnostic (014) 127
PCI interface diagnostic (020) 128
POST 112
power supply diagnostic (075) 130
RAID diagnostic (035) 128
SCSI interface diagnostic (030) 128
serial port diagnostic (011) 127
status display diagnostic (180) 132
system cache diagnostic (202) 133
system memory diagnostic (201) 132
thermal system diagnostic (175) 131
USB port interface diagnostic (015) 127
video system diagnostic (005) 127
microprocessor
application 61
Index
189
microprocessor (continued)
boot 61
installing 61
locations 63
problems 145
startup 145
microprocessor core-frequency-selection jumper
block 175
model features 3
model number 163
modem 91
monitor
adjusting of 15
connector 3, 12
controller 52
dusting of 16
placement of 16
problems 144
signal cable 12
mouse
connector 3, 12
port 94
problems 145
moving the server 2
multiple function PCI adapters 27
N
NDIS driver messages 140
Netfinity Advanced System Management Processor
connector 12
description 4
integrated in server 3
time configuration 22
Netfinity Service Processor Manager
problems 148
network
adapter, starting from 26
connection problems 149
Ethernet 34
Ethernet connector 96
Ethernet driver 136
network adapter compatibility with device drivers 60
network interface card 3, 34
NIC adapter 34
NMI LED 155
non-hot-swap drives, installing 69
non-hot-swappable drives
installing 69
setting jumpers 69
nonremovable media 67, 68
nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM)
configuration
notices
battery ix
laser compliance statement x
190
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
notices (continued)
safety information vii, 41
Novell NetWare/IntraNetWare messages
136
O
occasional problems 145
office space, arranging 15
online glossary xi, 1
operating system
installing using ServerGuide CDs 5
setup required for NIC adapter 35
support of hot-plug PCI adapters 4, 52
operator information panel 7, 10
option diskettes, copying 110
options
configuring 29
device records 165
diskettes 110
external, connecting 89
installation preparation 43
installing 39
internal
adapter 52
DIMM 64
drives 67
memory-module kits 64
locations 164, 165, 169
PCI, configuring 27
problems 146
SCSISelect Utility program 31
ordering
publications xii
replacement batteries 159
replacement keys 163
SCSI cable 89
OS/2
See operating system
output ports 11
overview
adapter installation considerations 54
diagnostic programs 108, 110
diagnostic tools 108
electrical safety 41
installing
external options 89
internal drives 67
microprocessors 61
POST (power-on self-test) 108
preparing to install options 43
problems, solving 107
server features 3
solving problems 107
troubleshooting charts 109
P
parallel port
assignment 21
bidirectional 21
configuration 21, 166
connector 92
enhanced parallel port (EPP) 21
extended capabilities port (ECP) 21
feature 3
location 12
port 92
problems 146
part numbers
keys 163
publications xii
serial 163
password
administrator 22, 24
forgotten administrator 24
general information 22
not set 22
power-on 23, 176
setting 25
PCI (peripheral component interconnect) architecture
adapter configuration 29
adapter locations 53
adapters 52
assigning interrupt levels 27
expansion slot numbers 53
expansion slots 11, 12
features and options 27
installation 55, 59
locations 53
slot numbers 173
PCI BUS A LED 155
PCI BUS B LED 155
Pentium III microprocessor 61
peripheral component interconnect (PCI) architecture
See PCI (peripheral component interconnect)
architecture
phone numbers
See telephone numbers, IBM
pin-number assignments
auxiliary-device port 94
Ethernet connector 96
keyboard port 93
parallel port 92
SCSI port 95
serial port 91
universal serial bus connectors 97
video port 93
planning workspace 15
pointing device
See also mouse
problems 145
ports, input/output
See also connectors
Advanced System Management Interconnect 11
assignments, changing 21
Ethernet 12
keyboard 12
management port C 12
monitor 12
mouse 12
parallel 12
See also parallel port
printer 12
SCSI 12, 89
serial
See serial port
serial (USB 1) 12
serial A 12
serial B 12
video 12
POST
See power-on self-test (POST)
POST Complete light 10
power
AC Power light 14
connector 12, 14
Control button 8
DC Power light 14
filler panel for power supply bay 14
supplies 13
power cables
See power cord
Power Control button 8
power cord
available, list of 179
cable-restraint bracket 80
lengths 16
location 16
Power LED for hot-plug PCI slot 53
POWER SUPPLY 1 LED 156
POWER SUPPLY 2 LED 156
POWER SUPPLY 3 LED 156
POWER SUPPLY NON REDUNDANT LED 156
power supply, hot-swap
installing 78
removing 80
power-cord strain-relief bracket
power-on
hot-swap drives 67
light 10
Power control button 8
power-on password
bypassing 23, 176
changing 23
deleting 24
features 22
forgotten 23, 176
Index
191
power-on password (continued)
on boot 23
setting or changing 23
power-on self-test (POST)
battery failure 113
beep codes 109, 122
during configuration 18
enhanced 26
error messages 112
event/error logs 28
forgotten power-on password 23
message table 112
overview 108
quick mode 26
table, message 112
precautions
electrical safety viii
predictive failure analysis 3
preface xi
preinstallation
steps 69
video controller 52
preinstalled devices 66, 67
preparing
for installation 40
for setup 40
internal drives for installation 69
to install
external options 89
options 43
to remove internal drives 75
printer
port 12
problems 147
SCSI 68
privileged-access password
See administrator password
problems, solving
configuration conflicts 151
diagnostic programs 108
diagnostic tools 108
error messages 109, 125
Ethernet controller 150
expansion enclosure 148
keyboard 145
memory 146
microprocessor 145
mouse 145
network adapter 60
network connection 149
option 146
overview 107
parallel port 146
pointing device 145
POST (power-on self-test) 108
POST beep codes 109, 122
192
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
problems, solving (continued)
POST messages 112
printer 147
running diagnostic programs
serial bus, universal 147
serial port 147
software 148
starting diagnostic programs
tests 108
troubleshooting charts 109,
USB 147
processor
See microprocessor
Processor 1 Activity light 10
Processor 2 Activity light 10
processor board
DIMM connectors 65
jumper blocks 175
jumpers 175
layout 175
switches 175
processor board data 21
processor housing
product
advantages 1, 67
identification numbers 163
internal and external options
name 163
product data 21
programs
advanced diagnostic 33
diagnostic 110
low-level format 33
protecting
data 24
the server 40
publications
ordering xii
part numbers xii
related xii
110
110
143
165
R
rack
connectors 11
power supplies 13
rack model
rack installation procedure
RAID adapter
installation considerations 60, 68
installing hard disk drive 74
reconfiguring disk arrays 74
RAS 5
read-only memory (ROM)
See ROM (read-only memory)
rear view 11
reconfiguring the server after replacing the battery 161
reconfiguring your server 88
records, device 164
reducing glare 16
redundant Ethernet 34
refresh rate 144
registering your server 1
related publications xii
reliability 5
removable media
bays 67
drives 67, 69
removing
administrator password 25
battery 160
cover
left-side (tower model) 47
top (rack model) 48
cover (rack model) 48
door 49
hard disk drives 75
power supply 80
power-on password 23, 24, 176
server cables 44
server door 49
trim bezel 50
trim bezels 50
wrong disk drive, consequences of 75
replacement batteries, ordering 159
replacing
battery 159
hot-swap fan assembly 82
hot-swap power supply 80
keys 163
requirements for terminating SCSI devices 69
Reset button 8
resources, allocating 27
restore settings 28
restoring configuration settings 28
RJ-45 connector 96
ROM (read-only memory)
address conflicts 151
RS-485
See Advanced System Management Interconnect
S
safety requirements
battery handling ix, 159
electrical viii, 41
handling static-sensitive devices
laser compliance statement x
save settings 28
scanners, SCSI 68
42
SCO UNIX messages 141
screen
blank 144
Configuration/Setup Utility main menu
flicker 144
SCSI disk utilities 32
screen filter 16
SCSI (small computer system interface)
cable requirements 68, 89
connector 12, 95
controller
See ServeRAID controller
description 68
devices 66, 68, 89
disk utilities 32
drives
external 89
location 67
low-level disk format 33
maximum SCSI cable lengths 89
port 3, 95
purpose 68
SCSI IDs
assignments 89
description 68
device records 164
for devices 68
purpose 69
viewing 32
SCSI cable for non-hot-swap bays 68
SCSI Hard Drive Activity light 10
SCSISelect Utility program
low-level disk format 33
menu description
SCSI Disk Utilities 32
starting 31
using 31
security procedures
See also password
defining system owner's name 25
general information 3
list of features 3
power-on password 23
self-tests, internal 108
sequence for installing adapters 29
serial number
keys 163
server 163
serial port
address 166
assignment 21
bus, universal 3, 147
connector 91
feature 3
location 12
location (USB 2) 12
20
Index
193
serial port (continued)
pin assignments 91
problems 147
universal bus 22
server
adding drives 67
adding memory 64
advantages 67
consequences of removing wrong disk drive 75
controls 7
cover
installing, rack model 87
installing, tower model 84
disk arrays 74
door
installing 86
removing 49
unlocking 44
external options 89
features at a glance 3
identification numbers 163
illustrated views
front 66
rear 11
installing drives 66, 69, 72
internal options 52
PCI adapter expansion slots 53
preparing, for installation of options 43
problems 110
records 164, 165, 169
removing drives 75
replacing drives 75
security features
list of 3
security, passwords 22, 25
startup options 26
server damage 158
ServeRAID controller
ServerGuide CDs 5
service processor
See Netfinity Advanced System Management
Processor
SERVICE PROCESSOR BUS LED 156
Service Processor Manager
See Netfinity Service Processor Manager
service, warranty
See telephone numbers, IBM
serviceability 5
setting
administrator password 25
Advanced System Management Processor time 22
jumpers 171
passwords 22, 24
power-on password 23
SCSI IDs 89
switches and jumpers 69
194
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
Setup program
See Configuration/Setup Utility program
side-cover release lever 8
size of server 170
sizes
internal drives 67, 68
memory 64
slots, expansion 11, 12
SMI LED 156
software
error 109, 148
problems 148
solving problems
configuration conflicts 151
diagnostic programs 108
diagnostic tools 108
error messages 109, 125
Ethernet controller 150
expansion enclosure 148
keyboard 145
memory 146
microprocessor 145
mouse 145
network adapter 60
network connection 149
option 146
overview 107
parallel port 146
pointing device 145
POST (power-on self-test) 108
POST beep codes 109, 122
POST messages 112
printer 147
running diagnostic programs 110
serial bus, universal 147
serial port 147
software 148
starting diagnostic programs 110
tests 108
troubleshooting charts 109, 143
USB 147
sound, acoustical noise output 170
speed
Ethernet controller 34
keyboard 26
memory 64
spilled liquid on server 158
Start Options
enhanced POST 26
keyboard speed 26
number lock 26
startup sequence 26
starting
Configuration/Setup Utility program 19
diagnostic programs 111
SCSISelect Utility Program 31
startup
drive 26
microprocessor 145
password 23
sequence 26
static-sensitive devices, handling 42
status
indicators
See lights
lights
See lights
storage
See memory-module kits
storage devices 66
summary of features 3
super video graphics array (SVGA) controller
supervisor password
See administrator password
supplies, power 13
SVGA video controller 52, 93
refid=mous.connector 94
switches
on processor board 175
Power Control 8
Reset 8
Symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) 61
symmetric multiprocessing (SMP) disk-array
technologies, 4
system board
adapters 52
battery failure 113
jumper locations 174
layout 173
system card data 21
System Error LED 154, 155, 156, 157
System Error light 10
system error log 110
system information 21
system owner's name 25
System POST Complete light 10
System Power light 10
system resources 27
System Security menu
administrator password 24
power-on password 23
system owner's name 25
system service processor 28
System Summary 21
systems management port 91
T
tape drive 67, 68
technical directory, publications
See telephone numbers, IBM
3, 151
telephone line requirements for the United Kingdom ix
telephone numbers, IBM
ordering batteries 159
ordering publications xii
TEMPERATURE LED 157
temperature of server environment 170
termination 69
terminator card 63
test log, viewing 111
testing
error messages 109
monitor 143
overview 108
POST (power-on self-test) 108
POST beep codes 109
programs 108
running 110
starting 110
three-pin jumper blocks 172
time, setting 22
tools 40
tower model
connectors 11
controls 7, 11
power supplies 13
transmit and receive data 91
trim bezels
installing 85, 88
removing 50
troubleshooting tips
CD-ROM drive problems 143
charts 143
Ethernet controller 149, 150
Netfinity Service Processor Manager problems 148
overview 109
turning on the server, problems 145
two-drop SCSI cable 68
two-pin jumper blocks 171
types of media 68
U
unattended start mode
and power-on password 22
and system startup 24
definition 22
unattended startup with password 24
United Kingdom safety information ix
United Kingdom telephone line requirements
United States safety information ix
universal serial bus (USB)
See USB (universal serial bus)
unknown power-on password
bypassing 23, 176
changing 23
removing 24
ix
Index
195
unlocking the server door 44
updating device records 88
updating server configuration 29
upgrading the microprocessor 61
USB (universal serial bus)
configuration 22
connectors 3, 22, 97
problems 147
utility programs
configuration 18
Configuration/Setup Utility program
diagnostic programs 110
SCSI disk 32
SCSISelect 31
19
V
venting of hot air 16
video
See also monitor
adapter requirements 52
connector 12, 93
connector location 173
controller 3, 52
disabling controller 27
port 93
ROM address conflicts 151
SVGA 52
view
diagnostic log 111
front 66
rear 11
SCSI controller settings 31
SCSI IDs 32
test log 111
viewing the diagnostic log 111
viewing the test log 111
virus checking 26
voltage regulator module 63
VRM 63
VRM LED 154
W
weight of server 170
work area, arranging 15
World Wide Web 40
glossary xi, 1
registering your server 1
server product information 1
wrap connector 111
write-back, microprocessor cache 27
write-through, microprocessor cache 27
196
Netfinity 5600 Hardware Information
IBM

Part Number: 37L6997
Printed in U.S.A.
September 1999
37L6997
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement